Nothing Special   »   [go: up one dir, main page]

P50 Agile P154: Technical Manual

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 286

P50 Agile P154

Technical Manual
Non Dir. O/C and E/F relay (4 elements)
Platform Hardware Version: A
Platform Software Version: 01
Publication Reference: P154/EN M/C

© - ALSTOM 2016. All rights reserved. Information contained in this document is indicative only. No representation or warranty is given or should be relied on that it
is complete or correct or will apply to any particular project. This will depend on the technical and commercial circumstances. It is provided without liability and is
subject to change without notice. Reproduction, use or disclosure to third parties, without express written authority, is strictly prohibited.
Conformity

This product complies with the directive of the Council of the European Communities relating to
electromagnetic compatibility (EMC directive 2004/108/EC) and product safety (Low-voltage
directive 2006/95/EC). This conformity is the result of a test conducted in accordance with the
product standard EN 60255- 26 for the EMC directive, and with the product standard EN 60255-
27 for the low voltage directive. The IED is designed in accordance with the international
standards of the IEC 60255 series.
P50 Agile P154 1 Introduction

INTRODUCTION

CHAPTER 1

P154/EN M/C 1-1


1 Introduction P50 Agile P154

1-2 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 1 Introduction

1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter consists of the following sections:

1 Chapter Overview
2 Introduction
2.1 Features
2.1.1 Protection & Control
2.1.2 Measurement, Recording & Post Fault Analysis
2.1.3 Front Panel Interface
2.1.4 Communications
2.2 Functional Overview
2.3 Ordering Information

P154/EN M/C 1-3


1 Introduction P50 Agile P154

2 INTRODUCTION

2.1 Features
The P154 is a four element (phase A, B, C, N) non-directional overcurrent and earth fault relay with its
functions designed to cover a wide range of applications in the protection of cables and overhead lines
deployed in industrial installations, public distribution networks, and other substations.
The P154 is an economical choice, designed for deployment in volume, in lower voltage systems, in
industrial installations, distribution network substations and as a backup relay in HV systems. P154
can also be applied for direct refurbishment of substations using older generations of non-
communicating overcurrent relays.
The principal protection functions in the relay are timed and instantaneous phase and earth fault
protection, with up to 3 independent stages available. IEC and IEEE curve types are provided for
IDMT functions. Additional versatility is provided thanks to the inclusion of negative sequence
overcurrent, thermal overload, cold load pickup, inrush blocking, broken conductor, breaker fail,
restricted earth fault, undercurrent/loss of load, and trip circuit supervision functions. Multiple setting
groups are included. The hardware capability is broadened by a sensitive earth fault CT option, and a
universal auxiliary power supply range to permit standardisation in procurement and inventories.
The user may assign any of the logical/physical statuses to binary inputs, binary outputs and
programmable LEDs. This provides flexibility to program the relay as per the application requirements.
All the output contacts are changeover type for ease of implementing the desired wiring schematic.
The P154 offers supervision functions including measurement, monitoring and recording. Industry and
utility protocols such as MODBUS, IEC 60870-5-103 and DNP3.0 are available for transmitting relay
data to a supervisory control system via communication networks. The intuitive operator interface
facilitates easy reading of measured values and simple configuration of the relay.

2.1.1 Protection & Control

• Timed and instantaneous phase and earth fault protection (3 independent stages)
• Wide range of IEC/IEEE curves
• Thermal overload
• Cold load pickup
• Inrush blocking
• Undercurrent/Loss of load detection
• Negative sequence overcurrent
• Broken conductor
• Circuit breaker Fail
• Restricted earth Fault
• Trip circuit supervision
• 6 Digital inputs
• 6 Digital output (c/o)
• 1A/5A CTs selection
• SEF option
• Latching of output contacts

1-4 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 1 Introduction

• Universal auxiliary power supply range

• 2 Setting groups
• Password protection
• Self-supervision & internal diagnostics

2.1.2 Measurement, Recording & Post Fault Analysis


• Metering of Phase currents
• Metering of Neutral currents-derived and measured
• Measurement of thermal state
• Positive and Negative sequence current
• Ration of negative to positive sequence current
• Breaker operation counter
• Breaker trip counter
• Breaker operating time
• Up to 512 time tagged event records
• Up to 5 Fault records
• Up to 5 disturbance records

2.1.3 Front Panel Interface


• 8 LEDs for status indication
• Backlit LCD display (16 x 2)
• 8 navigation keys for setting and interrogation

2.1.4 Communications
• Front USB port for real-time data viewing, device setting, and upload/download.
• Rear EIA (RS) 485 port for SCADA communication
• Multiple protocols - Modbus/ IEC60870-5-103 or DNP3.0 (ordering option)

2.2 Functional Overview


ANSI FUNCTION P154
50 Definite time overcurrent •
50N Neutral/Earth definite time overcurrent •
51 IDMT overcurrent •
51N Neutral/Earth IDMT overcurrent •
68 Inrush Blocking •
49 Thermal Overload •
37 Undercurrent detection (aux. power mode) •
46 Negative sequence overcurrent •
46BC Broken conductor •

P154/EN M/C 1-5


1 Introduction P50 Agile P154

ANSI FUNCTION P154


50BF Circuit breaker fail •
CLP Cold load pick-up •
64R Restricted earth fault •
86 Latching of output contacts (Lockout) •
Control Functions
74 Trip circuit supervision •
Watchdog function •
Self monitoring & diagnostics •
Test/Commissioning facilities •
HMI
Back-Lit LCD display •
8 x Touch Keys •
8 x status LEDs •
Communication
USB port •
Modbus/IEC 60870-5-103 (RS485) (or)
DNP3.0 •

Binary Input/Output
Binary Input 6
Binary Output 6 (c/o)
Analogue Input
Phase current input 3x1 ph •
Earth current input 1x1 ph (or)
SEF current input 1x1 ph •

General
Setting Groups 2
Self diagnostics •
Measurements •
Event records •
Fault records •
Disturbance records •
Configurable BI/BO/LEDs •
Hardware
Auxiliary supply 24-230 V AC/DC

Operating :
o o
- 25 C to + 55 C
Climatic conditions
Storage :
o o
-25 C to + 70 C

Front IP 52
Housing
Rear IP 20

1-6 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 1 Introduction

2.3 Ordering Information

Variants Order Number


1 - 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12-13 14 15
Model Type
Non Dir. O/C + E/F (4 Element) P154

Auxiliary Voltage Binary Input Threshold Voltage


24 – 230 V DC/AC 18V DC / 16V AC 1
24 – 230 V DC/AC 35V DC / 33V AC 2
24 – 230 V DC/AC 77V DC / 75V AC 3
24 – 230 V DC/AC 154V DC / 152V AC 4

Current Transformer
Standard CT 1
SEF CT 2

Hardware Options
EIA RS485 only 1

I/O Options
Standard ( 6 logic inputs + 6 relay outputs ) A

Communication Protocol
Modbus / IEC 60870-5-103 1
DNP3.0 2

Case
Non drawout A

Language
English or French (with French via relay HMI only) 1

Software Reference
Initial release (v1.xx) 01

Customisation / Regionalisation
Default 0
Customer specific A

Hardware design suffix


Initial release A

Figure 1: Ordering information

P154/EN M/C 1-7


1 Introduction P50 Agile P154

1-8 P154/EN M/C


SAFETY INFORMATION

CHAPTER 2
Safety Information Pxxx

2
Pxxx Safety Information

1 HEALTH AND SAFETY


Personnel associated with the equipment must be familiar with the contents of this Safety Information.
When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages are present in certain parts of the equipment.
Improper use of the equipment and failure to observe warning notices will endanger personnel.
Only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who are:
● familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and the system to which it
is being connected.
● familiar with accepted safety engineering practises and are authorised to energise and de-energise
equipment in the correct manner.
● trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practises
● trained in emergency procedures (first aid).

The documentation provides instructions for installing, commissioning and operating the equipment. It
cannot, however cover all conceivable circumstances. In the event of questions or problems, do not take any
action without proper authorisation. Please contact your local sales office and request the necessary
information.

3
Safety Information Pxxx

2 SYMBOLS
Throughout this manual you will come across the following symbols. You will also see these symbols on
parts of the equipment.

Caution:
Refer to equipment documentation. Failure to do so could result in damage to
the equipment

Warning:
Risk of electric shock

Earth terminal. Note: This symbol may also be used for a protective conductor (earth) terminal if that
terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly.

Protective conductor (earth) terminal

Instructions on disposal requirements

Note:
The term 'Earth' used in this manual is the direct equivalent of the North American term 'Ground'.

4
Pxxx Safety Information

3 INSTALLATION, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING

3.1 LIFTING HAZARDS


Many injuries are caused by:
● Lifting heavy objects
● Lifting things incorrectly
● Pushing or pulling heavy objects
● Using the same muscles repetitively

Plan carefully, identify any possible hazards and determine how best to move the product. Look at other
ways of moving the load to avoid manual handling. Use the correct lifting techniques and Personal Protective
Equipment (PPE) to reduce the risk of injury.

3.2 ELECTRICAL HAZARDS

Caution:
All personnel involved in installing, commissioning, or servicing this equipment
must be familiar with the correct working procedures.

Caution:
Consult the equipment documentation before installing, commissioning, or
servicing the equipment.

Caution:
Always use the equipment as specified. Failure to do so will jeopardise the
protection provided by the equipment.

Warning:
Removal of equipment panels or covers may expose hazardous live parts. Do
not touch until the electrical power is removed. Take care when there is
unlocked access to the rear of the equipment.

Warning:
Isolate the equipment before working on the terminal strips.

Warning:
Use a suitable protective barrier for areas with restricted space, where there is a
risk of electric shock due to exposed terminals.

Caution:
Disconnect power before disassembling. Disassembly of the equipment may
expose sensitive electronic circuitry. Take suitable precautions against
electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) to avoid damage to the equipment.

5
Safety Information Pxxx

Caution:
NEVER look into optical fibres or optical output connections. Always use optical
power meters to determine operation or signal level.

Caution:
Testing may leave capacitors charged to dangerous voltage levels. Discharge
capacitors by rediucing test voltages to zero before disconnecting test leads.

Caution:
Operate the equipment within the specified electrical and environmental limits.

Caution:
Before cleaning the equipment, ensure that no connections are energised. Use a
lint free cloth dampened with clean water.

Note:
Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly, which should not be removed.

3.3 UL/CSA/CUL REQUIREMENTS


The information in this section is applicable only to equipment carrying UL/CSA/CUL markings.

Caution:
Equipment intended for rack or panel mounting is for use on a flat surface of a
Type 1 enclosure, as defined by Underwriters Laboratories (UL).

Caution:
To maintain compliance with UL and CSA/CUL, install the equipment using UL/
CSA-recognised parts for: cables, protective fuses, fuse holders and circuit
breakers, insulation crimp terminals, and replacement internal batteries.

3.4 FUSING REQUIREMENTS

Caution:
Where UL/CSA listing of the equipment is required for external fuse protection, a
UL or CSA Listed fuse must be used for the auxiliary supply. The listed
protective fuse type is: Class J time delay fuse, with a maximum current rating
of 15 A and a minimum DC rating of 250 V dc (for example type AJT15).

6
Pxxx Safety Information

Caution:
Where UL/CSA listing of the equipment is not required, a high rupture capacity
(HRC) fuse type with a maximum current rating of 16 Amps and a minimum dc
rating of 250 V dc may be used for the auxiliary supply (for example Red Spot
type NIT or TIA).
For P50 models, use a 1A maximum T-type fuse.
For P60 models, use a 4A maximum T-type fuse.

Caution:
Digital input circuits should be protected by a high rupture capacity NIT or TIA
fuse with maximum rating of 16 A. for safety reasons, current transformer
circuits must never be fused. Other circuits should be appropriately fused to
protect the wire used.

Caution:
CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may produce lethal
hazardous voltages

3.5 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

Warning:
Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may
present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated.

Caution:
Tighten M4 clamping screws of heavy duty terminal block connectors to a
nominal torque of 1.3 Nm.
Tighten captive screws of terminal blocks to 0.5 Nm minimum and 0.6 Nm
maximum.

Caution:
Always use insulated crimp terminations for voltage and current connections.

Caution:
Always use the correct crimp terminal and tool according to the wire size.

Caution:
Watchdog (self-monitoring) contacts are provided to indicate the health of the
device on some products. We strongly recommend that you hard wire these
contacts into the substation's automation system, for alarm purposes.

7
Safety Information Pxxx

3.6 PROTECTION CLASS 1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

Caution:
Earth the equipment with the supplied PCT (Protective Conductor Terminal).

Caution:
Do not remove the PCT.

Caution:
The PCT is sometimes used to terminate cable screens. Always check the PCT’s
integrity after adding or removing such earth connections.

Caution:
Use a locknut or similar mechanism to ensure the integrity of stud-connected
PCTs.

Caution:
The recommended minimum PCT wire size is 2.5 mm² for countries whose
mains supply is 230 V (e.g. Europe) and 3.3 mm² for countries whose mains
supply is 110 V (e.g. North America). This may be superseded by local or
country wiring regulations.
For P60 products, the recommended minimum PCT wire size is 6 mm². See
product documentation for details.

Caution:
The PCT connection must have low-inductance and be as short as possible.

Caution:
All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections
that are pre-wired, but not used, should be earthed, or connected to a common
grouped potential.

3.7 PRE-ENERGISATION CHECKLIST

Caution:
Check voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation).

Caution:
Check CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections.

Caution:
Check protective fuse or miniature circuit breaker (MCB) rating.

8
Pxxx Safety Information

Caution:
Check integrity of the PCT connection.

Caution:
Check voltage and current rating of external wiring, ensuring it is appropriate for
the application.

3.8 PERIPHERAL CIRCUITRY

Warning:
Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced
may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Short the secondary of
the line CT before opening any connections to it.

Note:
For most Alstom equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer
termination is automatically shorted if the module is removed. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be
required. Check the equipment documentation and wiring diagrams first to see if this applies.

Caution:
Where external components such as resistors or voltage dependent resistors
(VDRs) are used, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns if touched.

Warning:
Take extreme care when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the
MMLG, MMLB and P990, as hazardous voltages may be exposed. Ensure that CT
shorting links are in place before removing test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal
voltages.

3.9 UPGRADING/SERVICING

Warning:
Do not insert or withdraw modules, PCBs or expansion boards from the
equipment while energised, as this may result in damage to the equipment.
Hazardous live voltages would also be exposed, endangering personnel.

Caution:
Internal modules and assemblies can be heavy and may have sharp edges. Take
care when inserting or removing modules into or out of the IED.

9
Safety Information Pxxx

4 DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL

Caution:
Before decommissioning, completely isolate the equipment power supplies
(both poles of any dc supply). The auxiliary supply input may have capacitors in
parallel, which may still be charged. To avoid electric shock, discharge the
capacitors using the external terminals before decommissioning.

Caution:
Avoid incineration or disposal to water courses. Dispose of the equipment in a
safe, responsible and environmentally friendly manner, and if applicable, in
accordance with country-specific regulations.

10
Pxxx Safety Information

5 STANDARDS COMPLIANCE
Compliance with the European Commission Directive on EMC and LVD is demonstrated using a Technical
File.

5.1 EMC COMPLIANCE: 2004/108/EC


Compliance with EN60255-26:2009 was used to establish conformity.

5.2 PRODUCT SAFETY: 2006/95/EC


Compliance with EN60255-27:2005 was used to establish conformity.

Protective Class
IEC 60255-27: 2005 Class 1 (unless otherwise specified in equipment documentation). This equipment
requires a protective conductor (earth) to ensure user safety.

Installation category
IEC 60255-27: 2005 Overvoltage Category 3. Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5kV peak,
1.2/50 mS, 500 Ohms, 0.5 J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits.

Environment
IEC 60255-27: 2005, IEC 60255-26:2009. The equipment is intended for indoor use only. If it is required for
use in an outdoor environment, it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will enable it to
meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54.

5.3 R&TTE COMPLIANCE


Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R&TTE) directive 99/5/EC.
Conformity is demonstrated by compliance to both the EMC directive and the Low Voltage directive, to zero
volts.

5.4 UL/CUL COMPLIANCE


If marked with this logo, the product is compliant with the requirements of the Canadian and USA
Underwriters Laboratories.
The relevant UL file number and ID is shown on the equipment.

5.5 ATEX COMPLIANCE


If marked with the logo, the equipment is compliant with article 192 of European directive 94/9/EC. It is
approved for operation outside an ATEX hazardous area. It is however approved for connection to Increased
Safety, "Ex e", motors with rated ATEX protection, equipment category 2, to ensure their safe operation in
gas zones 1 and 2 hazardous areas.

11
Safety Information Pxxx

Equipment with this marking is not itself suitable for operation within a potentially explosive
atmosphere.

Compliance demonstrated by Notified Body Type Examination Certificate.

ATEX Potentially Explosive Atmospheres directive 94/9/EC for equipment.

12
P50 Agile P154 3 Hardware Design

HARDWARE DESIGN

CHAPTER 3

P154/EN M/C 3-1


3 Hardware Design P50 Agile P154

3-2 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 3 Hardware Design

1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter consists of the following sections:

1 Chapter Overview
2 Hardware Design
2.1 Overview of Hardware design
2.2 Microcontroller with DSP module
2.2.1 Microcontroller module (Processor board) features
2.3 Microcontroller and analog measurement
2.4 Digital input /output module
2.5 Power supply module
2.6 Communication module
2.7 Human machine interface module

P154/EN M/C 3-3


3 Hardware Design P50 Agile P154

2 HARDWARE DESIGN
The P154 hardware comprises of following main components:

• Housing, consisting of a front panel and connections at the rear


• Microcontroller module
• Analogue input module
• Digital input module
• Digital output module
• Communication module
• Power supply unit
• Human machine Interface (HMI) module

Figure 1: P154 general assembly

3-4 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 3 Hardware Design

2.1 Overview of Hardware design


The P154 hardware design overview is explained with the help of the schematic diagram. The P154
hardware consists of three sets of internal Current Transformers (CTs). These internal CTs are
basically designed to cater to Protection & metering requirements. Dedicated CT is available for the
earth fault protection requirements. The relay also has provision for the built-in SMPS unit which
accepts power supply input of 24-230 V AC/DC from external source and outputs 12 V and 24 V DC
for internal circuitry. The current signals acquired as analogue inputs get processed through
operational amplifier, filter circuit, multiplexer, ADC (Analog to digital converter) and finally fed to CPU.
The CPU design is a hybrid of the digital signal processor (DSP) and high speed microcontroller which
runs complex algorithm for deriving the fundamental & harmonic component from the input current
signals. The digital inputs and outputs modules are designed to interface the monitoring, control and
protection signals through optically isolated circuit as per the field requirements. The other peripherals
modules like 16x2 LCD display, feather touch keys, USB and RS485 communication interfaces,
battery backup for RTC and built in memory circuits are integrated as per the schematic diagram and
enclosed in the IP-52 enclosure.

P154/EN M/C 3-5


3 Hardware Design P50 Agile P154

E00276

Figure 2: Hardware design overview

3-6 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 3 Hardware Design

2.2 Microcontroller with DSP module


The hardware is designed around 32 bit controller housed in small 100 pin SMD package. It is an high
speed fix point Controller having MIPS’s M4K® 32-bit core with 5-stage pipeline capable of operating
up to 80 MHz .This controller is referred as MCU (Microcontroller unit).

2.2.1 Microcontroller module (Processor board) features


• 512K Flash memory (plus an additional 12 KB of Boot Flash)
• 128K on chip SRAM memory
• Multiple interrupt vectors with individually programmable priority
• Fail-Safe Clock Monitor mode
• Configurable Watchdog Timer with on-chip Low-Power RC oscillator for reliable operation
• Internal 8 MHz and 32 kHz oscillators
• Six UART modules with:
• RS-232, RS-485 , USB and LIN support
• Four SPI modules
• Five I2C™ modules
• Hardware Real-Time Clock and Calendar (RTCC)
• Five 16-bit Timers/Counters

2.3 Microcontroller and analog measurement


P154 hardware supports 4 Analog inputs. The relay hardware uses external 16 bit ADC converter with
capability to sample 8 signals simultaneously to avoid any phase angle error and achieve higher
accuracy. In P154, only 4 channels of ADC converter are used. This external ADC can measure input
in a range of – 10 V to +10 V. The ADC is interfaced using SPI serial interface, to avoid any software
delays. The MCU continuously monitors different analog signals like line and E/F currents through
CTs, multiplexer and ADC.
The relay is designed for 5 amp and 1 amp CT secondary current signal. These inputs are further
scaled down to low voltage signal by using internal current and transformer. The internal current
transformer converts nominal current signal to 3.3mA. These analog signals are then passed through
protection circuit, anti aliasing filter and amplifier which scales analogue signal to required ADC range.
This anti aliasing filter blocks all high frequency components and surges to avoid measurement error.
The sample and hold (S/H) circuit and multiplexer sample all analog signals at same instant to avoid
and phase angle error and give maximum accuracy.

V00277

Figure 3: Analog signal processing

P154/EN M/C 3-7


3 Hardware Design P50 Agile P154

The MCU acquires analog values @ 16 samples per cycle. Digital signal processing (DSP) performs
powerful Numerical algorithms which convert this signal in to equivalent vectors. Once the signal is
converted into vectors, number of parameters are derived from it such as phase currents (Ia, Ib, Ic),
Positive sequence current (I1) and Negative sequence current (I2). The MCU also calculates harmonic
contents of the current signals (actual harmonics depend upon type of relay). All measurements are
tuned to fundamental frequency i.e. 50 Hz or 60 Hz, so that relay will remain stable during distorted
waveform generated by modern electronics load.
The typical Frequency response of tuned filter for 50 Hz is as shown in figure 4.

Figure 4: Frequency response of tuned filter for 50 Hz

The measurement is totally immune to all higher harmonics which makes relay operation absolute
reliable. All these measured values are then used for different protection functions such as over
current/Earth Fault and Negative phase sequences. The actual protection function depends on type of
relay and described in the rest of the document.

2.4 Digital input /output module


This module supports 6 numbers of Digital input DI and 6 numbers of Digital output DO channels for
acquiring filed signals or controlling field devices respectively. The DIs are isolated from other circuits
by using Opto isolators. The threshold voltage at which Opto coupler turns ON is controlled by
comparator based on the voltage range selected during device ordering.

2.5 Power supply module


The Power supply module is a designed using modern PWM based switching mode technique. It
converts input supply to the 12 V and 24 Vdc low voltage supply for relay electronics and control
circuit. It also provides necessary isolation from input power supply. The Normal operating voltage
range is 24 V – 230 VAC/DC.

2.6 Communication module


P154 supports 2 numbers of isolated ports for communication.

• (a) USB port provided on front of the relay


• (b) RS 485 (2 wired) port provided on the rear side of relay.
The relay can be accessed using the P50 Agile Configurator. Rear port supports open protocols like
IEC60870-5-103/MODBUS or DNP3.0 (ordering option) and is used for external communication.

3-8 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 3 Hardware Design

2.7 Human machine interface module


The HMI module is provided with 16x2 LCD, 8 numbers of soft feather touch keys and 8 numbers of
LEDs for indication. The cover at right side of the front panel houses following:-

• Female USB connector


• Serial number of relay.
• Model number of relay.
• Voltage and Current ratings.

Figure 5: Front panel of P154 relay

P154/EN M/C 3-9


3 Hardware Design P50 Agile P154

3-10 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 4 Front Panel

FRONT PANEL

CHAPTER 4

P154/EN M/C 4-1


4 Front Panel P50 Agile P154

4-2 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 4 Front Panel

1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter consists of the following sections:

1 Chapter Overview
2 Front Panel
2.1 User Interface
2.1.1 LCD Display
2.1.2 Touch Keys
2.1.3 LEDs
2.1.4 RS 485 Port
2.1.5 USB Port

P154/EN M/C 4-3


4 Front Panel P50 Agile P154

2 FRONT PANEL

1
5
2
6
3
7
4
8

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

Figure 1: Front panel

SL no Label Function
1 ON Green LED indicates that the IED is in correct working order, and should be ON at all times. It
turns red if the unit’s self-tests show there is an error in the hardware or software.
2 START Amber LED flashes when the IED registers an alarm. This may be triggered by a fault, event or
maintenance record. The LED flashes until the alarms have been accepted (read) by pressing
VIEW RECORD function key, then changes to constantly ON. When the alarms are cleared, the
LED switches OFF after pressing CLEAR key.
3 TRIP Red LED switches ON when the IED issues a trip signal. When the faults are cleared, the LED
switches OFF after pressing CLEAR key.
4 OUT OF SERVICE Amber LED flashes when the IED's protection is unavailable (eg. Setting Error, ADC Error
detected by unit’s self-test etc)
5 L5 Programmable dual colour LED
6 L6 Programmable dual colour LED
7 L7 Programmable dual colour LED
8 L8 Programmable dual colour LED
9 LCD Display The LCD display is used to view the settings and parameters of the relay.
10 EDIT Feather touch key to edit parameter settings.
11 CLEAR Feather touch key to clear the fault LED indications.
Also used to discard the setting changes.
12 VIEW RECORD Feather touch key to view fault records.
13 PROT. RESET Feather touch key to reset the hardware. This key to be used along with EDIT key. Relay will
reboot when ‘PROT. RESET’ + EDIT pressed simultaneously.
14 SET Feather touch key SET to save the settings and /◄ is used for navigating through the
/◄ menus/submenus.

15 + /▲ Feather touch key [+] is used to INCREASE the values and [▲] is used to change the menu
level or change between settings in a particular menu.
16 - /▼ Feather touch key [-] is used to DECREASE the values and [▼] is used to change the menu
level or change between settings in a particular menu.
17 ► Feather touch key [►] is used to view the settings and to navigate through the menus and
submenus.

4-4 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 4 Front Panel

2.1 User Interface

2.1.1 LCD Display


A backlit LCD display of 16 x 2 characters is provided for parameter and setting display, and for easy
viewing of measurement, setting, fault records, date & time and error messages. The backlit display
will switch off automatically after 100 seconds if no key is pressed. The backlit display will turn ON
automatically if any tripping occurs.

2.1.2 Touch Keys


The function of the relay is controlled by the following keys on the front panel.

(+) key is used to INCREASE the values


(▲) key is used to change the menu level or change between settings in a particular menu.

SET key is used to save the settings


(◄) key is used for navigating through the menus/submenus.

(►) key is used to view the settings and to navigate through the menus and submenus.

(-) key is used to DECREASE the values


(▼) key is used to change the menu level or change between settings in a particular menu.

EDIT key is used to edit the setting

CLEAR key is used to clear the fault LED indications. This key is also used to discard the setting
changes.

VIEW RECORD key is used to view the Fault, Maintenance and Event Records.

PROT. RESET key is used for Hardware reset. This key is interlocked with EDIT key. This key is
not required to be pressed in normal operation, but is used to reset the hardware of relay during a
relay firmware update.

Note: If changes are not made within 100 s while editing the settings then the display will reset itself and
return to the Main Menu.

2.1.3 LEDs
The P154 Relay has 8 high-intensity LEDs for easy identification of fault type and ease of user
interface.

P154/EN M/C 4-5


4 Front Panel P50 Agile P154

SL no Label Function
LED 1 ON Green LED indicates that the IED is in correct working order, and should be ON at all times. It
turns red if the unit’s self-tests show there is an error in the hardware or software.
LED 2 START Amber LED flashes when the IED registers an alarm. This may be triggered by a fault, event or
maintenance record. The LED flashes until the alarms have been accepted (read) by pressing
VIEW RECORD function key, then changes to constantly ON. When the alarms are cleared, the
LED switches OFF after pressing CLEAR key.
LED 3 TRIP Red LED switches ON when the IED issues a trip signal. When the faults are cleared, the LED
switches OFF after pressing CLEAR key.
LED 4 OUT OF SERVICE Amber LED flashes when the IED's protection is unavailable (eg. Setting Error, ADC Error
detected by unit’s self-test etc)
LED 5,6,7,8 - Programmable dual colour LED

2.1.4 RS 485 Port


RS485 port is provided at the rear of relay (near to terminal block) for permanent SCADA connectivity.
The separate 5 Pin connector is used to avoid accidental connection of power wiring to
communication input. The RS485 port can be used to download Settings, Fault data, Live Events and
Disturbance Records.

2.1.5 USB Port


The USB port is situated on the front panel in the bottom right hand corner, and can be accessed by
opening the flap on the front of the relay. This port is used to communicate with a locally connected
PC.
It has three main purposes:

• Transferring settings information to/from the PC from/to the device.


• Downloading firmware updates.
• Downloading relay data for analysis.

The port is intended for temporary connection during testing, installation and commissioning. It is not
intended to be used for permanent SCADA communications.
You can connect the unit to a PC with a USB cable up to 15 m in length.
The USB port includes a USB full-speed function controller, USB transceiver, oscillator, EEPROM, and
synchronous serial data bus (UART). No other external USB components are required.
For configuration/setting, appropriate ‘Config port’ has to be selected from the SYSTEM DATA menu.

4-6 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 4 Front Panel

Figure 2: USB port

P154/EN M/C 4-7


4 Front Panel P50 Agile P154

4-8 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

CONFIGURATION

CHAPTER 5

P154/EN M/C 5-1


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

P154/EN M/C 5-2


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter consists of the following sections:
1 Chapter Overview
2 Configuration
2.1 Changing the Settings
2.2 Password Entry
2.3 Menus
2.3.1 Default Display
2.3.2 Main Menu Contents
2.3.3 System Data Menu
2.3.3.1 View / Edit Settings
2.3.4 View Records Menu
2.3.4.1 View Records Menu Contents
2.3.4.2 View Fault Records
2.3.4.3 View Event Records
2.3.4.4 View Maintenance Records
2.3.4.5 View Alarm Records
2.3.5 Measurement Menu
2.3.5.1 View Contents
2.3.6 CB Control Menu
2.3.6.1 View/Edit Settings (if all settings are disabled)
2.3.6.2 View/Edit Settings (if all settings are enabled)
2.3.7 Date and Time Menu
2.3.7.1 Edit Settings (if the settings are disabled)
2.3.7.2 Edit Settings (if the settings are enabled)
2.3.8 Configuration Menu
2.3.8.1 View/Edit Settings
2.3.9 Transformer Ratios Menu
2.3.9.1 View/Edit Settings
2.3.10 Record Control Menu
2.3.10.1 View/Edit Settings
2.3.11 Communication Menu
2.3.11.1 View/Edit Settings
2.3.12 I/O Configuration Menu
2.3.12.1 View/Edit Settings
2.3.12.2 List of the submenus for Relay Output, LEDs and AND Logic configuration
2.3.13 O/P Relay Configuration Menu
2.3.13.1 View/Edit Settings
2.3.14 Disturbance Record Menu
2.3.14.1 View/Edit Settings
2.3.15 Commissioning Test Menu
2.3.15.1 View/Edit Settings
2.3.16 Group 1 Menu
2.3.16.1 Edit Settings
2.3.16.2 Group1 –System Configuration Submenu
2.3.16.3 Group1 –Overcurrent Submenu
2.3.16.4 Group1 –Negative Sequence Overcurrent Submenu
2.3.16.5 Group1 –Broken Conductor Submenu
2.3.16.6 Group 1 – Earth Fault 1 Submenu
2.3.16.7 Group1 – Earth Fault 2 Submenu
2.3.16.8 Group1 –Thermal Overload Submenu
2.3.16.9 Group1 – Cold Load Pickup Submenu
2.3.16.10 Group1 –Undercurrent Submenu
2.3.16.11 Group 1 – CB Fail Submenu

P154/EN M/C 5-3


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.3.17 Group 2 Menu


2.3.17.1 Edit Settings
2.4 Configuration Flowcharts
2.4.1 Main Menu
2.4.2 View and Edit Settings
2.4.3 View System Data Menu Settings
2.4.4 View Records Menu
2.4.4.1 View Content
2.4.4.2 View Fault Records
2.4.4.3 View Event Records
2.4.4.4 View Maintenance Records
2.4.4.5 View Alarm Records
2.4.5 Measurement Menu
2.4.5.1 View Settings
2.4.6 CB Control Menu
2.4.6.1 View/Edit Settings (if all settings are disabled)
2.4.6.2 View/Edit Settings (if all settings are enabled)
2.4.7 Date and Time Menu
2.4.7.1 View/Edit Settings (if all settings are disabled)
2.4.7.2 View/Edit Settings (if all settings are enabled)
2.4.8 Configuration menu
2.4.8.1 View/Edit Settings
2.4.9 Transformer Ratios Menu
2.4.9.1 View/Edit Settings
2.4.10 Record Control Menu
2.4.10.1 View/Edit Settings
2.4.11 Communication Menu
2.4.12 View/Edit settings
2.4.13 I/O Configuration Menu
2.4.14 View/Edit Settings
2.4.15 O/P Relay Configuration Menu
2.4.15.1 View/Edit Settings
2.4.16 Disturbance Record Menu
2.4.16.1 View/Edit Settings
2.4.17 Commissioning Test Menu
2.4.17.1 View/Edit Settings
2.4.18 Group1 Menu
2.4.18.1 View/Edit Settings
2.4.18.2 Group1 System Configuration Submenu
2.4.18.3 Group1 Overcurrent Submenu
2.4.19 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Menu
2.4.19.1 View/Edit Settings (If setting is disabled)
2.4.19.2 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for IEC curve)
2.4.19.3 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for IEEE curve)
2.4.19.4 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for DT)
2.4.20 Broken Conductor Menu
2.4.20.1 View/Edit Settings (If setting is disabled)
2.4.20.2 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled)
2.4.21 Group 1- Earth Fault 1 Submenu
2.4.21.1 View/Edit Settings (If setting is disabled)
2.4.21.2 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for IEC curve)
2.4.21.3 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for IEEE curve)
2.4.21.4 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for DT)
2.4.22 Group 1-Earth Fault 2 Submenu
2.4.22.1 View/Edit Settings (If setting is disabled)
2.4.22.2 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for IEC curve)

P154/EN M/C 5-4


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.22.3 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for IEEE curve)


2.4.22.4 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for DT)
2.4.23 Group 1- Thermal Overload Submenu
2.4.23.1 View/Edit Settings (If Characteristics is disabled)
2.4.23.2 View/Edit Settings (If Characteristics is set as Single)
2.4.24 Group 1- Cold Load Pickup Submenu
2.4.24.1 View/Edit Settings
2.4.24.2 View/Edit Settings (I>1 Function)
2.4.25 Group 1- Undercurrent Submenu
2.4.25.1 View/Edit Settings (If I< Status is disabled)
2.4.25.2 View/Edit Settings (If I< Status is enabled)
2.4.26 Group 1- CB Fail Submenu
2.4.26.1 View/Edit Settings (If CB FAIL Status is disabled)
2.4.26.2 View/Edit Settings (If CB FAIL Status is enabled)
2.4.27 Group 2 Menu
2.4.27.1 View/Edit Settings

P154/EN M/C 5-5


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2 CONFIGURATION
Each product has different configuration parameters according to the functions it has been
designed to perform. There is, however, a common methodology used across the entire product
to set these parameters.
This chapter describes an overview of this common methodology, as well as providing concise
instructions of how to configure the device.
Using the HMI, you can:
• Display and modify settings
• View the digital I/O signal status
• Display measurements
• Display fault records
• Reset fault and alarm indications

The keypad provides full access to the device functionality by means of a range of menu options.
Information is displayed on the LCD.

EDIT CLEAR Menu Keys


Key Key

Figure 1: P154 menu/function keys

P154/EN M/C 5-6


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.1 Changing the Settings

Step 1: Press the (4) key to move to the next option.


SYSTEM DATA

Step 2: Press the (- /) key to move to the next option till the relay
Language displays CB Open/Close setting
English

::: :::
Step 3: Press the (- /) key till the relay displays this option.
CB Open/Close

Open Press ‘EDIT’ key to edit the setting.

[All editable settings are password protected. So when the ‘EDIT’ key is
Password = 0001
pressed, it will display the password and the settable number/text will
start blinking].
Step 4: Enter the password by using the (+ /5) or the (- /) key. The
Password is four (4) digits alpha numeric.
Step 5: After editing the Password, press the ‘EDIT’ key, the Password
Password = 0000 OK message is displayed and settable number/text will start blinking and
** Password OK ** the relay will move to the next option.
Note: When the password is set, modification can be done in any
settings within 15 minutes. After the lapse of 15 minutes, the relay will
once again ask to re-enter the password.

Step 6: By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired selection can be
CB Open/Close set as shown in the display.
Open

Step 7: After setting, press the ‘EDIT’ key, the text will stop blinking and
CB Open/Close move to the next option.
Close Step 8: Press the () / (4) key, it will ask if you want to save the
settings and move to the next option.

Step 9: When the ‘SET’ key is pressed again, it will save the changes
SET For Save and move to the next option.
CLEAR For Cancel

This window will flash for a moment and the control will return to the
SAVE Settings main menu.

SYSTEM DATA

P154/EN M/C 5-7


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Note: The user can DISCARD SETTINGS by using the CLEAR Key.

Step 10: When the ‘CLEAR’ key is pressed it will discard the changes
SET For Save and the relay will move to the next option.
CLEAR For Cancel

This window will flash for a moment and the control will return to the
DISCARD Settings main menu.

SYSTEM DATA

2.2 Password Entry


Modification of the editable settings requires password access. You will be prompted for a
password before you can make any changes, as follows. The default password is 0000.
1. On pressing the EDIT key, a flashing cursor appears at the right most character field of
the password by default. Press the up or down cursor keys to change each character.
2. Use the left and right cursor keys to move between the character fields of the password.
3. Press the SET key to confirm the password. After entering a valid password the
Password OK message appears indicating that the password is correct. The user can
now start editing the settings. If the correct password has not been entered, the password
prompt page appears again. To stop this prompt press the CLEAR key.
4. A new password can be set using the Password cell in the SYSTEM DATA menu.
5. If the keypad is inactive for 15 minutes the user will again be prompted for a password
entry.

2.3 Menus

2.3.1 Default Display


After Power ON or when the ‘PROT.RESET + EDIT’ keys are pressed, the relay will display the
following message.
This window will flash momentarily showing the following.
P50 Agile P154
Relay Name: P50 Agile P154,
Feeder Protect’n Relay Type: Feeder Protection
Then the control will automatically move to next option.

This window will flash momentarily showing the following:-


ID =1
Unit ID = 1
SW = V1.04 Software Version =V1.04
Then the control will automatically move to the default window.

P154/EN M/C 5-8


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

SYSTEM DATA

2.3.2 Main Menu Contents

Password protected window for “SYSTEM DATA’’ setting i.e. Language,


SYSTEM DATA
Description, Model Number, Serial Number, Software Version,
Frequency, USB Address, USB Parity, USB Baud Rate, Password,
Active Group, Opto I/P Status, Relay O/P Status. CB Open/Close, Opto
I/P and Config Port.

This menu is to view Fault Record, Event Record, Maint Record and
VIEW RECORDS Alarm records.

This menu displays the measurements values of various parameters (i.e.


MEASUREMENTS
Phase current, measured and derived earth current, negative, positive
phase sequence current and I2/I1 ratio as per per phase / earth CT ratio,
TC (Trip Counter), BOC (Breaker Operation Counter), BOT (Breaker
Operating Time), Th State (Thermal State) and rms value of phase
currents.

Password protected window for “CB CONTROL” settings i.e. TCS


CB CONTROL Alarm, TCS Timer, CB Open S’vision (Enabled / Disabled), CB Open
Time, CB Open Alarm (Enabled / Disabled), CB Open Oper, CB Control
By, Close Pulse Time, Open Pulse Time .

Password protected window for “DATE AND TIME’’ settings i.e. Local
DATE AND TIME
Time Enable, Local Time Offset. DST Enable, DST Offset, DST Start,
DST Start Day, DST Start Month, DST Start Mins, DST End, DST End
Day, DST End Month, DST End Mins, RP Time Zone, SET Hours, SET
Minutes, SET Seconds, SET Date, SET Month and SET Year.

Password protected window for “CONFIGURATION’’ settings i.e.


CONFIGURATION Restore Defaults, Active Settings, Copy From, Copy To, Setting Group 1
(Enabled/Disabled), Setting Group 2 (Enabled/Disabled), System Config
(Enabled/Disabled), Overcurrent (Enabled/Disabled), Neg Sequence
O/C (Enabled/Disabled), Broken Conductor (Enabled/Disabled), Earth
Fault 1 (Enabled/Disabled), Earth Fault 2 (Enabled/Disabled), Thermal
Overload (Enabled/Disabled), Cold Load Pickup (Enabled/Disabled),
Measure’t Setup, UnderCurr Prot (Enabled/Disabled), CB Fail
(Enabled/Disabled) and Setting Values.

Password protected window for “TRANS. RATIO ’’ settings i.e Phase


TRANS. RATIOS CT Primary, Phase CT Sec’y, E/F CT Primary and E/F CT Secondary.

Password protected window for “RECORD CONTROL’’ settings i.e.


RECORD CONTROL Clear Events (Yes/No), Clear Faults (Yes/No), Clear Dist Recs (Yes/No),
Clear Maint (Yes/No), Thermal Reset (Yes/No).

P154/EN M/C 5-9


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Password protected window for “COMMUNICATION’’ settings i.e. RP1


COMMUNICATION Address, RP1 Baud Rate, RP1 Parity and RP1 Timesync.

Password protected window for “IO CONFIGURATION’’ settings i.e.


IO CONFIGURATION Relay, LED G, LED R, AND Logic and Opto I/P.

Password protected window for “O/P RELAY CONFIGURATION’’


O/P RELAY CONFIG
settings i.e. Contact HR/SR, O/P-1 Open Time, O/P-2 Open Time, O/P-
3 Open Time, O/P-4 Open Time, O/P-5 Open Time and O/P-6 Open
Time, LED G HR/SR, LED R HR/SR, ANDEQ A Op Time, ANDEQ A Rst
Time, ANDEQ B Op Time, ANDEQ B Rst Time, ANDEQ C Op Time,
ANDEQ C Rst Time, ANDEQ D Op Time and ANDEQ D Rst Time.

Password protected window for “DISTURBANCE RECORD” settings


DISTURBANCE REC i.e. Trigger Position.

Password protected window for “COMMISSIONING TEST” settings i.e.


COMMISSION. TEST Test Mode, Test Pattern, Contact Test and Test LEDs.

Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings i.e. SYSTEM


GROUP 1
CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled and set as
Active Group in Configuration setting.

Password protected window for “GROUP 2’’ settings i.e. SYSTEM


GROUP 2 CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 2 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled and set as
Active Group in Configuration setting.

2.3.3 System Data Menu

2.3.3.1 View / Edit Settings

Password protected window for “SYSTEM DATA’’ settings i.e.


SYSTEM DATA
Language, Description, Model Number, Serial Number, Software
Version, Frequency, USB Address, USB Parity, USB Baud Rate,
Password, Active Group, Opto I/P Status, Relay O/P Status. CB
Open/Close, Opto I/P and Config Port..

Read-only
Language
This window shows user interface is in English Language.
English

P154/EN M/C 5-10


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Read-only
Description
This window shows Description of the relay.
P50 Agile P154

Read-only
Model Number
This window shows the Model Number of the relay.
P154121A1A0010A

Read-only
Serial Number
This window shows the Serial Number of the relay.
xxxP154xxxx

Read-only
Software Version
This window shows the Software Version of the relay.
P154_1__1_0V1.04

Editable setting
Frequency
This window shows the System Frequency.
50Hz The desired Frequency can be selected to either 50/ 60 Hz.

Read-only
USB Address
This window shows the USB Address.
1

Read-only
USB Parity
This window shows the USB Parity.
None

Read-only
USB Baud Rate
This window shows the USB Baud Rate
57600

Editable setting
Password
This window is for setting the new Password of the relay. The desired
**** alpha numeric case sensitive password can be selected from 0000 to
zzzz and each digit can be set i.e. 0 to 9 / A to Z / a to z.

Read-only
Active Group
This window shows the Active Group selected in configuration.
Group 1

P154/EN M/C 5-11


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Read-only
Opto I/P 654321
This window shows the Opto Input status.
Status 000000

Read-only
Relay O/P 654321
This window shows the Relay Output status.
Status 000000

Editable setting
CB Open / Close
This window allows selection of the desired CB operation i.e. Open,
No operation Close and No operation.

Editable setting
Opto I/P
This window allows selection of voltage input type for the Opto I/P i.e.
DC AC / DC.

Editable setting
Config Port
This window allows selection of the Configuration Port of the relay
USB i.e. USB / RP

2.3.4 View Records Menu

2.3.4.1 View Records Menu Contents

This menu is to view Fault Record, Event Record, Maint Record and
VIEW RECORDS Alarm record.

This window is to view the Fault Record


Fault Record

This window is to view the Event Record


Event Record

This window is to view the Maint Record


Maint Record

P154/EN M/C 5-12


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

This window is to view the Alarm Record


Alarm Record

2.3.4.2 View Fault Records

This menu is to view Fault Record, Event Record, Maint Record and
VIEW RECORDS Alarm record.

This window shows the Fault Record


Fault Record

This window shows the Fault Number of latest fault.


Fault Num = 1

This window will show trip flag of stage 1: O/C, E/F-1 and E/F-2, Neg
I>1: I<: Sequence O/C, Under Current, Thermal Trip.
IN1>1: IN2>1: I2>1: Note: This window is seen when relay operates for respective protection
function. `

This window will show trip flag of stage 2: O/C, E/F-1 and E/F-2, Neg
I>2: Sequence O/C.
IN1>2: IN2>2: I2>2: Note: This window is seen when relay operates for respective protection
function.

This window will show trip flag of stage 3: O/C, E/F-1 and E/F-2, Neg
I>3: Sequence O/C.
IN1>3: IN2>3: I2>3: Note: This window is seen when relay operates for respective protection
function.

This window will show status flag (S1 – Opto Input 1, S2 – Opto Input 2,
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6
S3 – Opto Input 3, S4 – Opto Input 4, S5 – Opto Input 5, and S6 – Opto
CLP BC CBF TH EXT TR Input 6, CLP – Cold Load Pickup, BC – Broken Conductor, CBF – CB
Fail, TH – Thermal Trip, EXT TR – External Trip).
Note: This window is seen when status flag operates

This window will show secondary fault current values.


ia = 0.00 A

ib = 0.00 A

P154/EN M/C 5-13


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

This window will show secondary fault current values.


ic = 0.00 A

in1= 0.00 A

This window will show secondary fault current values.


in2 = 0.00 A

i2 = 0.00 A

This window will show secondary fault current values.


i1 = 0.00 A

I2/I1 =0.00

This window will show Thermal State.


Thermal State

0%

This window will show Trip counter.


Trip Counter

This window will show Trip time.


Trip Timing (Sec)

0.000

This window will show date & time of fault.


21/02/14

16:15:30.225

2.3.4.3 View Event Records


This menu is to view Fault Record, Event Record, Maint Record and
VIEW RECORDS Alarm record.

This window shows the Fault Record


Fault Record

P154/EN M/C 5-14


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

This window shows the Event Record


Event Record

This window shows the Event number of latest event.


Event Num = 1
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the relay will scroll between Event
numbers 1 to 512.

This window will show date & time of Event.


Dt: 21/02/2014

Tm: 16:15:30:225

This window shows the latest Event and Event number.


Event Num = 1

Trip IN1>

2.3.4.4 View Maintenance Records


This menu is to view Fault Record, Event Record, Maint Record and
VIEW RECORDS Alarm record.

This window shows the Fault Record


Fault Record

This window will show Event Record


Event Record

This window will show Maintenance Record contents


Maint Record

This window will show Maintenance Record 1


Main’t Rec Num =

P154/EN M/C 5-15


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

This window shows the contents of the Maintenance Record 1.


Errorcode : 0004

RTC Error

This window shows the date and time of error.


07/06/2014

17:20:30.596

2.3.4.5 View Alarm Records


This menu is to view Fault Record, Event Record, Maint Record and
VIEW RECORDS Alarm record.

This window shows the Fault Record


Fault Record

This window will show Event Record


Event Record

This window will show Maintenance Record


Maint Record

This window will show Alarm Record


Alarm Record

This window will show latest alarm.


TCS Alarm

This window shows the date and time of alarm.


24/09/2014

12:35:40:025

P154/EN M/C 5-16


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.3.5 Measurement Menu

2.3.5.1 View Contents


This menu displays the measurements values of various parameters (i.e.
MEASUREMENTS Phase current, measured and derived earth current, negative, positive
phase sequence current and I2/I1 ratio as per per phase / earth CT ratio,
TC (Trip Counter), BOC (Breaker Operation Counter), BOT (Breaker
Operating Time), Th State (Thermal State) and rms value of phase
currents.

This window shows primary value of current in phase A and B taking in


IA = 0 A to account phase CT ratio.
IB = 0 A

This window shows primary value of current in phase C and measured


IC = 0 A earth current taking in account phase CT and earth CT ratio respectively.
IN1 = 0 A

This window shows primary value of internally derived earth current.


IN2 = 0 A

This window shows secondary value of current in phase A and phase B.


ia = 0.00 A

ib = 0.00 A

This window shows secondary value of current in phase C and


ic = 0.00 A measured earth current.
in1 = 0.00 A

This window shows secondary value of internally derived earth current


in2= 0.00 A and positive sequence current.
i1 = 0.00 A

This window shows secondary value of negative sequence current and


i2 = 0.00 A ratio of negative and positive sequence current.
I2/I1 =0.000

This window shows Trip counter and Breaker operation counter.


TC : 0

BOC : 0

P154/EN M/C 5-17


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

This window shows Breaker operating time and actual Thermal State.
BOT : 0 msec

Th. State : 0%

This window shows secondary value of rms current in phase A and


Irms A = 0.00 A Phase B.
Irms B = 0.00 A

This window shows secondary value of RMS current in phase C.


Irms C = 0.00 A

P154/EN M/C 5-18


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.3.6 CB Control Menu

2.3.6.1 View/Edit Settings (if all settings are disabled)


Password protected window for “CB CONTROL” settings: TCS Alarm,
CB CONTROL
TCS Timer, CB Open S’vision , CB Open Time, CB Open Alarm , CB
Open Oper, CB Control By, Close Pulse Time and Open Pulse Time.

Editable setting
TCS Alarm
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, TCS Alarm can be set as Yes / No.
NO

Editable setting
CB Open S’vision
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, CB Open Supervision can be
Disabled Enabled or Disabled.

Editable setting
CB Open Alarm
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, CB Open Alarm can be Enabled or
Disabled Disabled.

Editable Setting
CB Control by
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, CB Control By can be set as
Disabled Disabled / Local / Remote / Local + Remote.

P154/EN M/C 5-19


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.3.6.2 View/Edit Settings (if all settings are enabled)


Password protected window for “CB CONTROL” settings: TCS Alarm,
CB CONTROL
TCS Alarm, TCS Timer, CB Open S’vision (Enabled/Disabled), CB Open
Time, CB Open Alarm (Enabled/Disabled), CB Open Oper, CB Control
By, Close Plus Time and Open Pulse Time.

Editable setting
TCS Alarm
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, TCS Alarm can be set as Yes / No.
YES

Editable setting
TCS Timer
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, TCS Timer can be set. The setting
5.00S range is from 0.1s to 10.00s in steps of 10ms.

Editable setting
CB Open S’vision
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, CB Open Supervision can be
Enabled Enabled or Disabled.

Editable setting
CB Open Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, CB Open Time can be set. The
0.30S setting range is from 50 ms to 1.0 s in steps of 10 ms

Editable setting
CB Open Alarm
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, CB Open Alarm can be Enabled or
Enabled Disabled.

Editable setting
CB Open Oper
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, CB Open operations can be set. The
2000 setting range is from 1 to 30000 in steps of 1.

Editable setting
CB Control by
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, CB Control By can be set as
Local + Remote Disabled /Local / Remote / Local + Remote.

P154/EN M/C 5-20


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
Close Pulse Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired Close Pulse Time can be
0.50S set. The setting range is from 0.1s to 50s in steps of 0.01s

Editable setting
Open Pulse Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired Open Pulse Time can be
0.50S set. The setting range is from 0.1s to 50s in steps of 0.01s

2.3.7 Date and Time Menu

2.3.7.1 Edit Settings (if the settings are disabled)


Password protected window for “DATE AND TIME” settings :
DATE AND TIME
Local Time Enable, Local Time Offset, DST Enable, DST Offset, DST
Start, DST Start Day, DST Start Month, DST Start minutes, DST End,
DST End Day, DST End Month, DST End minutes, RP Time Zone, SET
Hours, SET Minutes, SET Seconds, SET Date, SET Month and SET
Year.

Read-only
Tm: 17:21:50
This window shows the set Date & Time
Dt : 06/06/14 Wed

Editable setting
Local Time Enable
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Local Time Enable can be set as
Disabled Disabled / Fixed / Flexible.

Editable setting
DST Enable
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, DST Enable can be set as
Disabled Enabled/Disabled.

Editable setting
RP Time Zone
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, RP Time Zone can be set as Local /
Local UTC

Editable setting
SET Hours
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, SET Hours can be set. The setting
17 range is from 0 to 23 in steps of 1.

P154/EN M/C 5-21


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
SET Minutes
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, SET Minutes can be set. The setting
21 range is from 0 to 59 in steps of 1.

Editable setting
SET Seconds
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, SET Seconds can be set. The setting
50 range is from 0 to 59 in steps of 1.

Editable setting
SET Date
By using (+ /5) or (- /) key, SET Date can be set. The setting range
12 is from 1 to 31 in steps of 1.

Editable setting
SET Month
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, SET Month can be set. The setting
11 range is from 1 to 12 in steps of 1.

Editable setting
SET Year
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, SET Year can be set. The setting
14 range is from 0 to 99 in steps of 1.

2.3.7.2 Edit Settings (if the settings are enabled)


Password protected window for “DATE AND TIME” settings :
DATE AND TIME
Local Time Enable, Local Time Offset, DST Enable, DST Offset, DST
Start, DST Start Day, DST Start Month, DST Start minutes, DST End,
DST End Day, DST End Month, DST End minutes, RP Time Zone, SET
Hours, SET Minutes, SET Seconds, SET Date, SET Month and SET
Year.

Read-only
Tm: 17:21:50
This window shows the set Date & Time
Dt : 06/06/14 Fri

Editable setting
Local Time Enable
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Local Time Enable can be set as
Fixed Disabled / Fixed / Flexible.

Editable setting
Local Time Offset
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Local Time Offset can be set. The
0 Mins setting range is from -720 mins to 720 mins in step 15 mins

P154/EN M/C 5-22


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
DST Enable
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, DST Enable can be set as
Enabled Enabled/Disabled.

Editable setting
DST Offset
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, DST Offset can be set as 30Mins /
60 Mins 60Mins.

Editable setting
DST Start
By using the (+ /5) or the Minus / Down arrow key (- /) key, DST
Last Start can be set as First / Second/ Third / Fourth / Last.

Editable setting
DST Start Day
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, DST Start Day can be set from
Sunday Sunday to Saturday.

Editable setting
DST Start Month
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, DST Start Month can be set from
March January to December

Editable Setting
DST Start Mins
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, DST Start minutes can be set. The
60 Mins setting range is from 0 to 1425 mins in steps of 15 mins.

Editable setting
DST End
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, DST End can be set as First /
Last Second/ Third / Fourth / Last.

Editable setting
DST End Day
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, DST End Day can be set from
Sunday Sunday to Saturday.

Editable setting
DST End Month
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, DST End Month can be set from
October January to December

P154/EN M/C 5-23


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
DST End Mins
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, DST End minutes can be set. The
60 Mins setting range is from 0 to 1425 mins in steps of 15 mins.

Editable setting
RP Time Zone
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, RP Time Zone can be set as Local /
Local UTC

Editable setting
SET Hours
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, SET Hours can be set. The setting
17 range is from 0 to 23 in steps of 1.

Editable setting
SET Minutes
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, SET Minutes can be set. The setting
21 range is from 0 to 59 in steps of 1.

Editable setting
SET Seconds
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, SET Seconds can be set. The setting
50 range is from 0 to 59 in steps of 1.

Editable setting
SET Date
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, SET Date can be set. The setting
12 range is from 1 to 31 in steps of 1.

Editable setting
SET Month
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, SET Month can be set. The setting
11 range is from 1 to 12 in steps of 1.

Editable setting
SET Year
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, SET Year can be set. The setting
14 range is from 0 to 99 in steps of 1.

P154/EN M/C 5-24


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.3.8 Configuration Menu

2.3.8.1 View/Edit Settings


Password protected window for “CONFIGURATION’’ settings i.e.
CONFIGURATION
Restore Defaults, Active Settings, Copy From, Copy To, Setting Group 1
(Enabled/Disabled), Setting Group 2 (Enabled/Disabled), System Config
(Enabled/Disabled), Overcurrent (Enabled/Disabled), Neg Sequence
O/C (Enabled/Disabled), Broken Conductor (Enabled/Disabled), Earth
Fault 1 (Enabled/Disabled), Earth Fault 2 (Enabled/Disabled), Thermal
Overload (Enabled/Disabled), Cold Load Pickup (Enabled/Disabled),
Measure’t Setup, UnderCurr Prot (Enabled/Disabled), CB Fail
(Enabled/Disabled) and Setting Values.

Editable setting
Restore Defaults
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Restore Defaults can be set as No
No Operation Operation / All Settings / Setting Group 1 / Setting Group 2.

Editable setting
Active Settings
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Active Setting can be set as Group 1
Group 1 / Group 2.

Editable setting
Copy From
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Copy From can be set as Group 1 /
Group 1 Group 2.

Editable setting
Copy To
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Copy To can be set as No Operation
No Operation / Group 1 / Group 2.

Editable setting
Setting Group 1
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Setting Group 1 can be Enabled or
Enabled Disabled.

Editable setting
Setting Group 2
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Setting Group 2 can be Enabled or
Disabled Disabled.

Editable setting
System Config
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, System Configuration can be
Disabled Enabled or Disabled.

P154/EN M/C 5-25


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
Overcurrent
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Over Current can be Enabled or
Enabled Disabled.

Editable setting
Neg Sequence O/C
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Negative Sequence O/C can be
Disabled Enabled or Disabled.

Editable setting
Broken Conductor
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Broken conductor can be Enabled
Disabled or Disabled.

Editable setting
Earth Fault 1
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Earth Fault 1 can be Enabled or
Enabled Disabled.

Editable setting
Earth Fault 2
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Earth Fault 2 can be Enabled or
Enabled Disabled.

Editable setting
Thermal Overload
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Thermal Overload can be Enabled
Disabled or Disabled.

Editable setting
Cold Load Pickup
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Cold Load Pickup can be Enabled or
Disabled Disabled.

Editable setting
Measure’t setup
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Measurement Setup can be set as
ABC ABC / RYB.

Editable setting
UnderCurr Prot
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Under Current Protection can be
Disabled Enabled or Disabled.

P154/EN M/C 5-26


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
CB Fail
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, CB Fail can be Enabled or Disabled.
Disabled

Editable setting
Setting Values
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Setting Values can be set as Primary
Secondary / Secondary.

2.3.9 Transformer Ratios Menu

2.3.9.1 View/Edit Settings


Password protected window for “TRANS. RATIOS settings :
TRANS. RATIOS
Phase CT Primary, Phase CT Secondary, E/F CT Primary and E/F CT
Secondary.

Editable setting
Phase CT Primary
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Phase CT Primary can be set. The
100 A setting range is from 1A to 30000A step 1A.

Editable setting
Phase CT Sec’y
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Phase CT Secondary can be set as
1A 1A / 5A.

Editable setting
E/F CT Primary
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, E/F CT Primary can be set. The
100 A setting range is from 1A to 30000A step 1A.

Editable setting
E/F CT Secondary
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, E/F CT Secondary can be set as 1A /
1A 5A.

2.3.10 Record Control Menu

2.3.10.1 View/Edit Settings


Password protected window for “RECORD CONTROL’’ settings :
RECORD CONTROL
Clear Events (Yes/No), Clear Faults (Yes/No), Clear Dist Recs (Yes/No),
Clear Maint (Yes/No), Thermal Reset (Yes/No).

P154/EN M/C 5-27


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
Clear Events
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Clear Event Records can be set as
No Yes / No.
(set ‘Yes’ to clear event data stored in memory)

Editable setting
Clear Faults
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Clear Fault Records can be set as
No Yes / No.
(set ‘Yes’ to clear Fault data stored in memory)

Editable setting
Clear Dist Recs
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Clear Disturbance Records can be
No set as Yes / No.
(set ‘Yes’ to clear Disturbance Record data stored in memory)

Editable setting
Clear Maint
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Clear Maintenance Records can be
No set as Yes / No.
(set ‘Yes’ to clear Maintenance Record data stored in memory)

Editable setting
Thermal Reset
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Thermal Reset can be set as Yes /
No No.
(set ‘Yes’ to reset Thermal State to zero)

2.3.11 Communication Menu

2.3.11.1 View/Edit Settings


Password protected window for “COMMUNICATION” settings :
COMMUNICATION
RP1 Address, RP1 Baud Rate, RP1 Parity and RP1 Timesync.

Editable setting
RP1 Address
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired RP1 Address can be set.
1 The setting range is from 1 to 247 in steps of 1.

Editable setting
RP1 Baud Rate
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired RP1 Baud Rate can be
57600 set as 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600

Editable setting
RP1 Parity
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired RP1 Parity can be set as
Even Even / Odd / None.

Editable setting
RP1 Timesync
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, RP1 Timesync can be Enabled /
Disabled Disabled

P154/EN M/C 5-28


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.3.12 I/O Configuration Menu

2.3.12.1 View/Edit Settings

Password protected window for “OP CONTACT CONFIGURATION’’


IO CONFIGURATION settings: Relay, LED Green, LED Red, AND Logic and Opto I/P.

Editable setting
Relay : 654321
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the output relay RL1 – RL6 can be
Gen Strt 000000 set for desired function.
‘1’ corresponds to RL1, ‘2’ corresponds to RL2,…’6’ corresponds to RL6
Set the value ‘1’ for assigned / ‘0’ for not assigned under the numbers
representing output relay.

Editable setting
LED G : 8765
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, LED GREEN can be set for desired
Gen Strt 0000 function.
‘5’ corresponds to LED L5, ‘6’ corresponds to LED L6,…’8’ corresponds
to LED L8
Set the value ‘1’ for assigned / ‘0’ for not assigned under the numbers
representing LED GREEN.

Editable setting
LED R : 8765
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, LED RED can be set for desired
Gen Strt 0000 function.
‘5’ corresponds to LED L5, ‘6’ corresponds to LED L6,…’8’ corresponds
to LED L8
Set the value ‘1’ for assigned / ‘0’ for not assigned under the numbers
representing LED RED.

Editable setting
AND Logic : DCBA
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the AND Logic function (A,B,C,D)
Gen Strt 0000 can be set for desired function.
Set the value ‘1’ for assigned / ‘0’ for not assigned under the letters
representing AND Logic function.

Editable setting
Opto I/P : 654321
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Opto inputs can be set for desired
Rem. Rst. 000000 function.
‘1’ corresponds to Opto I/P S1, ‘2’ corresponds to Opto I/P S2,…’6’
corresponds to Opto I/P S6
Set the value ‘1’ for assigned / ‘0’ for not assigned under the numbers
representing Opto I/Ps.

2.3.12.2 List of the submenus for Relay Output, LEDs and AND Logic configuration

2.3.12.2.1 Relay Output Configuration


Relay outputs can be assigned by selecting any function available in the submenus. There are in
all 6 numbers of output Relays identified as RL1 to RL6.

P154/EN M/C 5-29


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.3.12.2.2 LED Green Configuration


LED G (Green) can be assigned by selecting any function available in the submenus. There are in
all 4 numbers of LEDs identified as L5 to L8.

2.3.12.2.3 LED Red Configuration


LED R (Red) can be assigned by selecting any function available in the submenus. There are in
all 4 numbers of LEDs identified as L5 to L8.

2.3.12.2.4 AND Logic


AND Logic can be assigned by selecting any function available in the submenus. There are in all
4 numbers of AND Logic with identifier as A, B, C & D.
The functions assigned to Relay, LED G, LED R and AND Logic are listed in Chapter 8:
Monitoring and Control.

2.3.13 O/P Relay Configuration Menu

2.3.13.1 View/Edit Settings


Password protected window for “O/P RELAY CONFIGURATION’’
O/P RELAY CONFIG
settings: Contact HR/SR, O/P-1 Open Time, O/P-2 Open Time, O/P-3
Open Time, O/P-4 Open Time, O/P-5 Open Time and O/P-6 Open Time,
LED G HR/SR, LED R HR/SR, ANDEQ A Op Time, ANDEQ Rst Time,
ANDEQ B Op Time, ANDEQ B Rst Time, ANDEQ C Op Time, ANDEQ C
Rst Time, ANDEQ D Op Time and ANDEQ D Rst Time.

Editable setting
Contact HR/SR
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired Contact HR/SR can be
000000 set as ‘1’=HR / ’0’=SR.

Editable setting
O/P–1 Open Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired O/P–1 Open Time can be
0.50 S set. The setting range is from 0 to 1s in steps of 0.01s

Editable setting
O/P–2 Open Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired O/P–2 Open Time can be
0.50 S set. The setting range is from 0 to 1s in steps of 0.01s

Editable setting
O/P–3 Open Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired O/P–3 Open Time can be
0.50 S set. The setting range is from 0 to 1s in steps of 0.01s

Editable setting
O/P–4 Open Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired O/P–4 Open Time can be
0.50 S set. The setting range is from 0 to 1s in steps of 0.01s

P154/EN M/C 5-30


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
O/P–5 Open Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired O/P–5 Open Time can be
0.50 S set. The setting range is from 0 to 1s in steps of 0.01s

Editable setting
O/P–6 Open Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired O/P–6 Open Time can be
0.50 S set. The setting range is from 0 to 1s in steps of 0.01s

Editable setting
LED G HR/SR
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired LED GREEN HR/SR can
0000 be set. i.e. ‘1’=HR / ’0’=SR.

Editable setting
LED R HR/SR
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired LED RED HR/SR can be
0000 set. i.e. ‘1’=HR / ’0’=SR.

Editable setting
ANDEQ A Op Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired AND Equation A
1S Operation Time can be set. The setting range is from 1 to 3600s in
steps of 1s.

Editable setting
ANDEQ A Rst Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired AND Equation A Reset
1S Time can be set. The setting range is from 1 to 3600s in steps of 1s.

Editable setting
ANDEQ B Op Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired AND Equation B
1S Operation Time can be set. The setting range is from 1 to 3600s in
steps of 1s.

Editable setting
ANDEQ B Rst Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired AND Equation B Reset
1S Time can be set. The setting range is from 1 to 3600s in steps of 1s.

Editable setting
ANDEQ C Op Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired AND Equation C
1S Operation Time can be set. The setting range is from 1 to 3600s in
steps of 1s.

Editable setting
ANDEQ C Rst Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired AND Equation C Reset
1S Time can be set. The setting range is from 1 to 3600s in steps of 1s.

P154/EN M/C 5-31


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
ANDEQ D Op Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired AND Equation D
1S Operation Time can be set. The setting range is from 1 to 3600s in
steps of 1s.

Editable setting
ANDEQ D Rst Time
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired AND Equation D Reset
1S Time can be set. The setting range is from 1 to 3600s in steps of 1s.

2.3.14 Disturbance Record Menu

2.3.14.1 View/Edit Settings


Password protected window for “Disturbance Record” settings:
DISTURBANCE REC Trigger Position

Editable setting
Trigger Position
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired Trigger Position can be
50% set. The setting range is from 10% to 90% in steps of 1.

2.3.15 Commissioning Test Menu

2.3.15.1 View/Edit Settings

Password protected window for “Commissioning Test” settings:


COMMISSION. TEST
Test Mode, Test Pattern, Contact Test and Test LEDs.

Editable setting
Test Mode
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Test Mode be set as Disabled/Test
Disabled Mode/Contacts Blocked.

Editable setting
Test Pattern
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Test Pattern can be set.
000000 Setting ‘1’ means that output relay contact will be tested when the
Contact Test cell is set to Apply Test.
Setting ‘0’ means that output relay contact will not be tested when the
Contact Test cell is set to Apply Test.
Eg: Setting 100010 will operate RL6 & RL2 during Contact test

Editable setting
Contact Test
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Contact Test can be set for No
No Operation Operation / Apply Test / Remove Test

P154/EN M/C 5-32


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
Test LEDs
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Test LEDs can be set for No
No Operation Operation / Apply Test.

2.3.16 Group 1 Menu

2.3.16.1 Edit Settings


Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for System Configuration i.e. 2nd


SYSTEM CONFIG Harmonic (Disabled/Enabled), 2ndHarm Thresh and I>lift 2H.
Note: Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in Configuration

Password protected window for Overcurrent i.e. I>1 Function, I>2


OVERCURRENT
Function and I>3 Function. The functions can be set as Disabled / DT /
IDMT.
Note: Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in Configuration

Password protected window for Negative Sequence O/C i.e. I2>1


NEG SEQUENCE O/C
Function, I2>2 Function and I2>3 Function. The functions can be set as
Disabled / DT / IDMT.
Note: Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in Configuration
setting.

Password protected window for Broken Conductor i.e. BC Alarm


BROKEN CONDUCTOR
(Enable/Disabled), I2/I1 Setting - 1 and I2/I1 Time Dly – 1, BC Trip
(Enable/Disabled), I2/I1 Setting - 2 and I2/I1 Time Dly - 2.

Password protected window for Earth Fault 1 (measured) i.e. IN1>1


EARTH FAULT 1
Function, IN1>2 Function and IN1>3 Function. The functions can be set
as Disabled / DT / IDMT.
Note: Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in Configuration
setting.

Password protected window for Earth Fault 2 (derived) i.e. IN2>1


EARTH FAULT 2
Function, IN2>2 Function and IN2>3 Function. The functions can be set
as Disabled / DT / IDMT.
Note: Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in Configuration
setting.

Password protected window for Thermal Overload i.e. Characteristic


THERMAL OVERLOAD (Disabled/Single), Thermal Trip, Thermal Alarm, Time Constant 1 and K.
Note: Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in Configuration
setting.

P154/EN M/C 5-33


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Password protected window for Cold Load Pickup i.e. tcold Time Delay,
COLD LOAD PICKUP tclp Time Delay, I>1 Status, I>2 Status, I>3 Status, IN1>1 Status, IN1>2
Status, IN1>3 Status, IN2>1 Status, IN2>2 Status and IN2>3 Status.
Note: Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in Configuration
setting.

Password protected window for Undercurrent i.e. I< Status, I< and tI<.
UNDERCURRENT
Note: Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in Configuration
setting.

Password protected window for CB FAIL i.e. CB Fail Status, CB Fail


CB FAIL Timer, CB Reset, I<, IN<, Remove I> Start and Remove IN> Start.
Note: Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in Configuration
setting.

2.3.16.2 Group1 –System Configuration Submenu

2.3.16.2.1 Edit Settings (if 2nd harmonic is disabled)


Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting..

Password protected window for System Configuration i.e. 2nd


SYSTEM CONFIG Harmonic (Disabled/Enabled), 2ndHarm Thresh and I>lift 2H.

Editable setting
2nd Harmonic
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, 2nd Harmonic is Disabled.
Disabled

2.3.16.2.2 Edit Settings (if 2nd harmonic is enabled)


Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for System Configuration i.e. 2nd


SYSTEM CONFIG Harmonic (Disabled/Enabled), 2ndHarm Thresh and I>lift 2H.

Editable setting
2nd Harmonic
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, 2nd Harmonic is Enabled.
Enabled

P154/EN M/C 5-34


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
2nd Harm Thresh
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired 2ndHarm Thresh can be
20% set. The setting range is 5% to 70% in steps of 1%.

Editable setting
I>lift 2H
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired I>lift 2H setting can be
10.00 A done. The setting range is 4.00 to 32.00 In in steps of 0.01 In.

2.3.16.3 Group1 –Overcurrent Submenu

2.3.16.3.1 Edit Settings (if I>1 Function, I>2 Function and I>3 Function are disabled)
Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Overcurrent i.e. I>1 Function, I>2


OVERCURRENT
Function and I>3 Function setting to Disabled / DT/ IEC S Inverse/ S
Inverse (1.3Sec)/ IEC V Inverse/ IEC E Inverse/ UK LT Inverse /IEEE M
Inverse/ IEEE V Inverse/ IEEE E Inverse /US Inverse /US ST Inverse

Editable setting
I>1Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1Function can be Disabled
Disabled

Editable setting
I>2Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>2Function can be Disabled
Disabled

Editable setting
I>3Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>3Function can be Disabled
Disabled

2.3.16.3.2 Edit Settings (if I>1 Function is selected for IEC curve)
Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ setting:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Overcurrent i.e. I>1 Function, I>2


OVERCURRENT
Function and I>3 Function setting to Disabled / DT/ IEC S Inverse/ S
Inverse (1.3Sec)/ IEC V Inverse/ IEC E Inverse/ UK LT Inverse /IEEE M
Inverse/ IEEE V Inverse/ IEEE E Inverse /US Inverse /US ST Inverse

P154/EN M/C 5-35


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable Setting
I>1 Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1Function is set as IEC S Inverse.
IEC S Inverse

Editable setting
I>1 Current Set
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 Current Setting can be set. The
1.00 A setting range is from 0.05 to 4.00 In in steps of 0.01 In.

Editable setting
I>1 TMS
By using (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 TMS can be set. The setting range is
1.000 from 0.025 to 1.2 in steps of 0.005.

Read-only setting
I>1 Reset Char
I>1 Reset Char is fixed as DT (Definite Time).
DT

Editable setting
I>1 tRESET
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 tRESET can be set. The setting
1.00 S range is from 0 to 100s in steps of 0.01s.

Editable setting
I>1 2H Blocking
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>12H Blocking function can be
Disabled Enabled / Disabled.

2.3.16.3.3 Edit Settings (if I>1 Function is selected for IEEE / US curve)

Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ setting :


GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Overcurrent i.e. I>1 Function, I>2


OVERCURRENT Function and I>3 Function setting to Disabled / DT/ IEC S Inverse/ S
Inverse (1.3Sec)/ IEC V Inverse/ IEC E Inverse/ UK LT Inverse /IEEE M
Inverse/ IEEE V Inverse/ IEEE E Inverse /US Inverse /US ST Inverse

Editable setting
I>1 Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1Function is set as
IEEE M Inverse IEEE M Inverse.

P154/EN M/C 5-36


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
I>1 Current Set
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 Current Setting can be set. The
1.00 A setting range is from 0.05 to 4 In in steps of 0.01 In.

Editable setting
I>1 Time Dial
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 Time Dial can be set. The setting
1.00 range is from 00.01 to 100.00 in steps of 0.01.

Editable setting
I>1 Reset Char By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 Reset Char can be set as IDMT /
DT DT (Definite Time).

Editable setting
I>1 tRESET
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 tRESET can be set. The setting
1.00 S range is from 0 to 100s in steps of 0.01s.

Editable setting
I>1 RTMS
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 RTMS can be set. The setting
1.000 range is from 0.025 to 1.200 in steps of 0.005
Note: Above setting available if I>1 Reset Char is set as IDMT

Editable setting
I>1 2H Blocking
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>12H Blocking function can be
Disabled Enabled / Disabled.

2.3.16.3.4 Edit Settings (if I>1 Function is selected for DT)


Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ setting:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Overcurrent i.e. I>1 Function, I>2


OVERCURRENT
Function and I>3 Function setting to Disabled / DT/ IEC S Inverse/ S
Inverse (1.3Sec)/ IEC V Inverse/ IEC E Inverse/ UK LT Inverse /IEEE M
Inverse/ IEEE V Inverse/ IEEE E Inverse /US Inverse /US ST Inverse

Editable setting
I>1 Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1Function is set as DT.
DT

Editable setting
I>1 Current Set
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, the desired I>1 Current Setting can
1.00 A be done. The setting range is from 0.05 to 35.0 In in steps of 0.01 In.
Note: For I>3 Function. the setting range is from 1.0 - 35.0 In in steps of
0.01 In.

P154/EN M/C 5-37


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
I>1 Time Delay
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 Time Delay can be set. The
01.00 S setting range is from 0 to 100s in steps of 0.01s.

Read-only
I>1 Reset Char
I>1 Reset Char is fixed as DT (Definite Time).
DT

Editable setting
I>1 tRESET
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 tRESET can be set. The setting
1.00 S range is from 0 to 100s in steps of 0.01s.

Editable setting
I>1 2H Blocking
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 2H Blocking function can be
Disabled Enabled / Disabled.

Note: The settings of I>2 Function and I>3 Function should be done in a similar manner as I>1 Function.

2.3.16.4 Group1 –Negative Sequence Overcurrent Submenu

2.3.16.4.1 Edit Settings (if I2>1 Function, I2>2 Function and I2>3 Function are disabled)
Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ setting:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, select the NEGATIVE SEQUENCE


NEG SEQUENCE O/C O/C setting menu in Group 1.
Password protected window for NEGATIVE SEQUENCE O/C settings :
I2>1 Function, I2>2 Function and I2>3 Function can be set as Disabled /
DT / IEC S Inverse/ S Inverse (1.3Sec)/ IEC V Inverse/ IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse /IEEE M Inverse/ IEEE V Inverse/ IEEE E Inverse /US
Inverse /US ST Inverse

Editable setting
I2>1Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>1 Function is Disabled.
Disabled

Editable setting
I2>2Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>2 Function is Disabled.
Disabled

P154/EN M/C 5-38


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
I2>3Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>3 Function is Disabled.
Disabled

2.3.16.4.2 Edit Settings (if I2>1 Function is selected for IEC curve)

Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ setting:


GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for NEGATIVE SEQUENCE O/C settings :


NEG SEQUENCE O/C
I2>1 Function, I2>2 Function and I2>3 Function can be set as Disabled /
DT / IEC S Inverse/ S Inverse (1.3Sec)/ IEC V Inverse/ IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse /IEEE M Inverse/ IEEE V Inverse/ IEEE E Inverse /US
Inverse /US ST Inverse

Editable setting
I2>1 Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>1 Function is set as
IEC S Inverse IEC S Inverse.

Editable setting
I2>1 Current Set
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>1 Current Setting can be set. The
1.00 A setting range is from 0.10 to 4.00 In in steps of 0.01.

Editable setting
I2>1 TMS
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>1 TMS can be set. The setting
1.000 range is from 0.025 to 1.200 in steps of 0.005.

Read-only
I2>1 Reset Char
The I2>1 Reset Char is fixed as DT (Definite Time).
DT

Editable setting
I2>1 tRESET
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>1 tRESET can be set. The setting
1.00 S range is from 0 to 100s in steps of 0.01s.

Editable setting
I2>1 2HBlocking
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>12HBlocking function can be
Disabled Enabled / Disabled.

P154/EN M/C 5-39


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.3.16.4.3 Edit Settings (if I2>1 Function is selected for IEEE / US curve)
Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for NEGATIVE SEQUENCE O/C settings :


NEG SEQUENCE O/C
I2>1 Function, I2>2 Function and I2>3 Function can be set as Disabled /
DT / IEC S Inverse/ S Inverse (1.3Sec)/ IEC V Inverse/ IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse /IEEE M Inverse/ IEEE V Inverse/ IEEE E Inverse /US
Inverse /US ST Inverse

Editable setting
I2>1 Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>1 Function is set as
IEEE M Inverse IEEE M Inverse.

Editable setting
I2>1 Current Set
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>1 Current Setting can be set. The
1.00 A setting range is from 0.10 to 4.00 In in steps of 0.01 In.

Editable setting
I2>1 Time Dial
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>1 Time Dial can be set. The
1.00 setting range is from 0.01 to 100.00 in steps of 0.01.

Editable setting
I2>1 Reset Char
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>1 Reset Char can be set as IDMT
DT / DT.

Editable setting
I2>1 tRESET
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>1 tRESET can be set. The setting
1.00 S range is from 0 to 100s in steps of 0.01s.

Editable setting
I2>1 RTMS
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>1 RTMS can be set. The setting
1.000 range is from 0.025 to 1.200 in steps of 0.005
Note: Above setting available if I2>1 Reset Char is set as IDMT

Editable setting
I2>1 2H Blocking
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>12H Blocking function can be
Disabled Enabled / Disabled.

P154/EN M/C 5-40


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.3.16.4.4 Edit Settings (if I2>1 Function is selected for DT)

Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:


GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for NEGATIVE SEQUENCE O/C settings :


NEG SEQUENCE O/C I2>1 Function, I2>2 Function and I2>3 Function can be set as Disabled /
DT / IEC S Inverse/ S Inverse (1.3Sec)/ IEC V Inverse/ IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse /IEEE M Inverse/ IEEE V Inverse/ IEEE E Inverse /US
Inverse /US ST Inverse

Editable setting
I2>1 Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>1Function is set as DT (Definite
DT Time).

Editable setting
I2>1 Current Set
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>1 Current Setting can be set. The
1.00 A setting range is from 0.10 to 35.0 In in steps of 0.01 In.
Note: For I2>3 Function, the setting range is from 1.0 - 35.0 In in steps of
0.01 In

Editable setting
I2>1 Time Delay
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>1 Time Delay can be set. The
1.00 S setting range is from 0 to 200s in steps of 0.01s.

Read-only
I2>1 Reset Char
I2>1 Reset Char is fixed as DT (Definite Time).
DT

Editable setting
I2>1 tRESET
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>1 tRESET can be set. The setting
1.00 S range is from 0 to 100s in steps of 0.01s.

Editable setting
I2>1 2H Blocking
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2>12H Blocking function can be
Disabled Enabled / Disabled.

Note: The settings of I2>2 Function and I2>3 Function should be done in a similar manner as I2>1
Function

P154/EN M/C 5-41


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.3.16.5 Group1 –Broken Conductor Submenu

2.3.16.5.1 Edit Settings (if function is disabled)


Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Broken Conductor i.e. BC Alarm


BROKEN CONDUCTOR (Enable/Disabled), I2/I1 Setting - 1 and I2/I1 Time Dly – 1, BC Trip
(Enable/Disabled), I2/I1 Setting - 2 and I2/I1 Time Dly - 2.

Editable setting
BC Alarm
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, BC Alarm is Disabled.
Disabled

Editable setting
BC Trip
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, BC Trip is Disabled.
Disabled

2.3.16.5.2 Edit Settings (if function is enabled)


Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Broken Conductor i.e. BC Alarm


BROKEN CONDUCTOR (Enable/Disabled), I2/I1 Setting - 1 and I2/I1 Time Dly – 1, BC Trip
(Enable/Disabled), I2/I1 Setting - 2 and I2/I1 Time Dly - 2.

Editable setting
BC Alarm
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, BC Alarm is Enabled.
Enabled

Editable setting
I2/I1Set-1
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2/I1 Set-1 can be set. The setting
0.50 range is from 0.20 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01

P154/EN M/C 5-42


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
I2/I1 Time Dly-1
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2/I1 Time Dly-1 can be set. The
10.00S setting range is from 0 to 100s in steps of 0.01s.

Editable setting
BC Trip
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, BC Trip is Enabled.
Enabled

Editable setting
I2/I1Set-2
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2/I1 Set-2 can be set. The setting
0.50 range is from 0.20 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01

Editable setting
I2/I1 Time Dly-2
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I2/I1 Time Dly-2 can be set. The
10.00S setting range is from 0 to 100s in steps of 0.01s.

2.3.16.6 Group 1 – Earth Fault 1 Submenu

2.3.16.6.1 Edit Settings (if IN1>1 Function, IN1>2 Function and IN1>3 Function are disabled)
Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Earth Fault 1 (measured) i.e. IN1>1


EARTH FAULT 1
Function, IN1>2 Function and IN1>3 Function can be set as Disabled /
DT / IEC S Inverse/ S Inverse (1.3Sec)/ IEC V Inverse/ IEC E Inverse/
UK LT Inverse /IEEE M Inverse/ IEEE V Inverse/ IEEE E Inverse /US
Inverse /US ST Inverse

Read-only
Measured
Description for Earth Fault 1

Editable setting
IN1>1Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1 Function is Disabled.
Disabled

Editable setting
IN1>2Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>2 Function is Disabled.
Disabled

P154/EN M/C 5-43


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
IN1>3Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>3 Function is Disabled.
Disabled

2.3.16.6.2 Edit Settings (if IN1>1 Function is selected for IEC curve)
Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Earth Fault 1 (measured) i.e. IN1>1


EARTH FAULT 1
Function, IN1>2 Function and IN1>3 Function which can be set as
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse/ S Inverse (1.3Sec)/ IEC V Inverse/ IEC E
Inverse/ UK LT Inverse /IEEE M Inverse/ IEEE V Inverse/ IEEE E
Inverse /US Inverse /US ST Inverse

Read-only
Measured
Description for Earth Fault 1

Editable setting
IN1>1 Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1Function is set as
IEC S Inverse IEC S Inverse.

Editable setting
IN1>1 Current Set
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1 Current Setting can be set.
1.00 A The setting range is from 0.05 to 4 In in steps of 0.01 In.
NOTE: For SEF (Ordering option) setting range is 0.002 to 0.200 In in
step of 0.001 In.

Editable setting
IN1>1 TMS
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1 TMS can be set. The setting
1.000 range is from 0.025 to 1.200 in steps of 0.005.

Read-only
IN1>1 Reset Char
IN1>1 Reset Char is fixed as DT (Definite Time).
DT

Editable setting
IN1>1 tRESET
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1 tRESET can be set. The
01.00 S setting range is from 0 to 100s in steps of 0.01s.

P154/EN M/C 5-44


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
IN1>1 2HBlocking
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1 2HBlocking function can be
Disabled Enabled / Disabled.

2.3.16.6.3 Edit Settings (if IN1>1 Function is selected for IEEE / US curve)
Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Earth Fault 1 ( measured) i.e. IN1>1


EARTH FAULT 1
Function, IN1>2 Function and IN1>3 Function which can be set as
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse/ S Inverse (1.3Sec)/ IEC V Inverse/ IEC E
Inverse/ UK LT Inverse /IEEE M Inverse/ IEEE V Inverse/ IEEE E
Inverse /US Inverse /US ST Inverse

Read-only
Measured
Description for Earth Fault 1

Editable setting
IN1>1 Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1Function is set as IEEE M
IEEE M Inverse Inverse.

Editable setting
IN1>1 Current Set
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1 Current Setting can be set.
1.00 A The setting range is from 0.05 to 4 In in steps of 0.01 In.
NOTE: For SEF (Ordering option) setting range is 0.002 to 0.200 In in
step of 0.001In

Editable setting
IN1>1 Time Dial
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1 Time Dial can be set. The
1.00 setting range is from 0.01 to 100.00 in steps of 0.01.

Editable setting
IN1>1 Reset Char
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1 Reset Char can be set as
DT IDMT / DT.

Editable setting
IN1>1 tRESET
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1 tRESET can be set. The
1.00 S setting range is from 0 to 100s in steps of 0.01s.

P154/EN M/C 5-45


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
IN1>1 RTMS
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1 RTMS can be set. The setting
1.000 range is from 0.025 to 1.200 in steps of 0.005
Note: Above setting is available if IN1>1 Reset Char is set as IDMT

Editable setting
IN1>1 2HBlocking
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1 2HBlocking function can be
Disabled Enabled / Disabled.

2.3.16.6.4 Edit Settings (if IN1>1 Function is selected for DT)


Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Earth Fault 1 (measured) i.e. IN1>1


EARTH FAULT 1
Function, IN1>2 Function and IN1>3 Function which can be set as
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse/ S Inverse (1.3Sec)/ IEC V Inverse/ IEC E
Inverse/ UK LT Inverse /IEEE M Inverse/ IEEE V Inverse/ IEEE E
Inverse /US Inverse /US ST Inverse

Read-only
Measured
Description for Earth Fault 1

Editable setting
IN1>1 Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1Function is set as DT.
DT

Editable setting
IN1>1 Current Set
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1 Current Setting can be set.
1.00 A The setting range is from 0.05 to 35.0 In in steps of 0.01 In.
Note: For I>3 Function, the setting range is from 1.0 - 35.0 In in steps of
0.01In.
For SEF (Ordering option) setting range is 0.002 to 0.200 In in steps of
0.001In for IN1>1 and IN1>2 and 0.002 to 2.000 In in step of 0.001 In for
IN1>3

Editable setting
IN1>1 Time Delay
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1 Time Delay can be set. The
1.00 S setting range is from 0 to 200s in steps of 0.01s.

Read-only
IN1>1 Reset Char
IN1>1 Reset Char is fixed as DT (Definite Time).
DT

P154/EN M/C 5-46


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
IN1>1 tRESET
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1 tRESET can be set. The
1.00 S setting range is from 0 to 100s in steps of 0.01s.

Editable setting
IN1>1 2HBlocking
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1 2HBlocking function can be
Disabled Enabled / Disabled.

Note: The settings of IN1>2 Function and IN1>3 Function to be set in similar manner as that of IN1>1
Function.

2.3.16.7 Group1 – Earth Fault 2 Submenu

2.3.16.7.1 Edit Settings (if IN2>1 Function, IN2>2 Function and IN2>3 Function are disabled)
Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Earth Fault 2 (derived) i.e. IN2>1


EARTH FAULT 2
Function, IN2>2 Function and IN2>3 Function which can be set as
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse/ S Inverse (1.3Sec)/ IEC V Inverse/ IEC E
Inverse/ UK LT Inverse /IEEE M Inverse/ IEEE V Inverse/ IEEE E
Inverse /US Inverse /US ST Inverse.

Read-only
Derived
Description for Earth Fault 2

Editable setting
IN2>1Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 Function is Disabled.
Disabled

Editable setting
IN2>2Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>2 Function is Disabled.
Disabled

Editable setting
IN2>3Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>3 Function is Disabled.
Disabled

P154/EN M/C 5-47


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.3.16.7.2 Edit Settings (if IN2>1 Function is selected for IEC curve)
Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Earth Fault 2 (derived) i.e. IN2>1


EARTH FAULT 2
Function, IN2>2 Function and IN2>3 Function which can be set as
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse/ S Inverse (1.3Sec)/ IEC V Inverse/ IEC E
Inverse/ UK LT Inverse /IEEE M Inverse/ IEEE V Inverse/ IEEE E
Inverse /US Inverse /US ST Inverse.

Read-only
Derived
Description for Earth Fault 2

Editable setting
IN2>1 Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1Function is set as
IEC S Inverse IEC V Inverse.

Editable setting
IN2>1 Current Set
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 Current Setting can be set.
1.00 A The setting range is from 0.05 to 4 In in steps of 0.01 In.

Editable setting
IN2>1 TMS
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 TMS can be set. The setting
1.000 range is from 0.025 to 1.200 in steps of 0.005.

Read-only
IN2>1 Reset Char
IN2>1 Reset Char is fixed as DT (Definite Time).
DT

Editable setting
IN2>1 tRESET
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 tRESET can be set. The
1.00 S setting range is from 0 to 100s in steps of 0.01s.

Editable setting
IN2>1 2HBlocking
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 2HBlocking function can be
Disabled Enabled / Disabled.

P154/EN M/C 5-48


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.3.16.7.3 Edit Settings (if IN2>1 Function is selected for IEEE / US curve)
Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Earth Fault 2 (derived) i.e. IN2>1


EARTH FAULT 2
Function, IN2>2 Function and IN2>3 Function which can be set as
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse/ S Inverse (1.3Sec)/ IEC V Inverse/ IEC E
Inverse/ UK LT Inverse /IEEE M Inverse/ IEEE V Inverse/ IEEE E
Inverse /US Inverse /US ST Inverse.

Read-only
Derived
Description for Earth Fault 2

Editable setting
IN2>1 Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 Function is set as
IEEE M Inverse IEEE M Inverse.

Editable setting
IN2>1 Current Set
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 Current Setting can be set.
1.00 A The setting range is from 0.05 to 4 In in steps of 0.01In.

Editable setting
IN2>1 Time Dial
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 Time Dial can be set. The
1.00 setting range is from 0 to 200 in steps of 0.01.

Editable setting
IN2>1 Reset Char
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 Reset Char can be set as
DT IDMT / DT.

Editable setting
IN2>1 tRESET
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 tRESET can be set. The
1.00 S setting range is from 0 to 100s in steps of 0.01s.

Editable setting
IN2>1 RTMS
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 RTMS can be set. The setting
1.000 range is from 0.025 to 1.200 in steps of 0.005
Note: Above setting is available if IN2>1 Reset Char is set as IDMT

P154/EN M/C 5-49


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
IN2>1 2HBlocking
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 2HBlocking function can be
Disabled Enabled / Disabled.

2.3.16.7.4 Edit Settings (if IN2>1 Function is selected for DT)


Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Earth Fault 2 (derived) i.e. IN2>1


EARTH FAULT 2
Function, IN2>2 Function and IN2>3 Function which can be set as
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse/ S Inverse (1.3Sec)/ IEC V Inverse/ IEC E
Inverse/ UK LT Inverse /IEEE M Inverse/ IEEE V Inverse/ IEEE E
Inverse /US Inverse

Read-only
Derived
Description for Earth Fault 2

Editable setting
IN2>1 Function
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1Function is set as DT.
DT

Editable setting
IN2>1 Current Set
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 Current Setting can be set.
1.00 A The setting range is from 0.1 to 35.0 In in steps of 0.01In.
Note: For I>3 Function. the setting range is from 1.0 to 35.0 In in steps of
0.01In

Editable setting
IN2>1 Time Delay
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 Time Delay can be set. The
1.00 S setting range is from 0 to 200s in steps of 0.01s.

Read-only
IN2>1 Reset Char
IN2>1 Reset Char is fixed as DT (Definite Time).
DT

Editable setting
IN2>1 tRESET
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 tRESET can be set. The
1.00 S setting range is from 0 to 100s in steps of 0.01s.

P154/EN M/C 5-50


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
IN2>1 2H Blocking
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 2H Blocking function can be
Disabled Enabled / Disabled.

Note: The settings of IN2>2 Function and IN2>3 Function to be done in similar manner as that of
IN2>1
Function.

2.3.16.8 Group1 –Thermal Overload Submenu

2.3.16.8.1 Edit Settings (if Thermal overload Characteristic is disabled)


Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Thermal Overload i.e. Characteristic


THERMAL OVERLOAD (Disabled/Single), Thermal Trip, Thermal Alarm, Time Constant 1 and K.

Editable setting
Characteristic
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Characteristic is set as Disabled
Disabled

2.3.16.8.2 Edit Settings (if Thermal overload Characteristic is set as Single)


Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Thermal Overload i.e. Characteristic


THERMAL OVERLOAD (Disabled/Single), Thermal Trip, Thermal Alarm, Time Constant 1 and K.

Editable setting
Characteristic
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Characteristic is set as Single
Single

Editable setting
Thermal Trip
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Thermal Trip can be set. The setting
1.00 A range is from 0.05 to 4.00 In in steps of 0.01 In.

P154/EN M/C 5-51


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
Thermal Alarm
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Thermal Alarm can be set. The
70% setting range is from 50% to 100% in steps of 1%.

Editable setting
Time Constant 1
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Time Constant 1 can be set. The
10 setting range is from 1 to 200 in steps of 1.

Editable setting
K
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, K Constant can be set. The setting
1.05 range is from 1 to 1.5 in steps of 0.01.

2.3.16.9 Group1 – Cold Load Pickup Submenu

2.3.16.9.1 Edit Settings


Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting..

Password protected window for Cold Load Pickup i.e. tcold Time Delay,
COLD LOAD PKP
tclp Time Delay, I>1 Status, I>2 Status, I>3 Status, IN1>1 Status, IN1>2
Status, IN1>3 Status, IN2>1 Status, IN2>2 Status and IN2>3 Status.

Editable setting
tcold Time Delay
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, tcold Time Delay can be set. The
7200 S setting range is from 0 to 14400s in steps of 1s.

Editable setting
tclp Time Delay
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, tclp Time Delay can be set. The
7200 S setting range is from 0 to 14400s in steps of 1s.

Editable setting
I>1 Status
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 Status can be Enabled / Blocked.
Enabled

Editable setting
I>2 Status
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>2 Status can be Enabled / Blocked.
Enabled

P154/EN M/C 5-52


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
I>3 Status
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>3 Status can be Enabled / Blocked.
Enabled

Editable setting
IN1>1 Status
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN1>1 Status can be Enabled /
Enabled Blocked.

Editable setting
IN1>2 Status
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>2 Status can be Enabled /
Enabled Blocked.

Editable setting
IN1>3 Status
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>3 Status can be Enabled /
Enabled Blocked.

Editable setting
IN2>1 Status
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>1 Status can be Enabled /
Enabled Blocked.

Editable setting
IN2>2 Status
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>2 Status can be set as Enabled /
Enabled Blocked.

Editable setting
IN2>3 Status
By using (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN2>3 Status can be Enabled / Blocked.
Enabled

P154/EN M/C 5-53


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.3.16.9.2 Edit Settings (If I>1 Function selected for IEC curve)
Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled and set as
Active Group in Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Cold Load Pickup i.e. tcold Time Delay,
COLD LOAD PKP
tclp Time Delay, I>1 Status, I>2 Status, I>3 Status, IN1>1 Status, IN1>2
Status, IN1>3 Status, IN2>1 Status, IN2>2 Status and IN2>3 Status.

Editable setting
tcold Time Delay
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, tcold Time Delay can be set. The
7200 S setting range is from 0 to 14400s in steps of 1s.

Editable setting
tclp Time Delay
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, tclp Time Delay can be set. The
7200 S setting range is from 0 to 14400 in steps of 1.

Editable setting
I>1 Status
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, desired I>1 Status is Enabled.
Enabled

Editable setting
I>1 Current Set
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 Current Set can be set. The
1.50 A setting range is from 0.05 to 4.00 In in steps of 0.01 In.

Editable setting
I>1 TMS
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 TMS can be set. The setting
1.1 range is from 0.025 to 1.2 in steps of 0.005

P154/EN M/C 5-54


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.3.16.9.3 Edit Settings (If I>1 Function selected for IEEE / US curve)
Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled and set as
Active Group in Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Cold Load Pickup i.e. tcold Time Delay,
COLD LOAD PKP
tclp Time Delay, I>1 Status, I>2 Status, I>3 Status, IN1>1 Status, IN1>2
Status, IN1>3 Status, IN2>1 Status, IN2>2 Status and IN2>3 Status.

Editable setting
tcold Time Delay
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, tcold Time Delay can be set. The
7200 S setting range is from 0 to 14400s in steps of 1s.

Editable setting
tclp Time Delay
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, tclp Time Delay can be set. The
7200 S setting range is from 0 to 14400 in steps of 1.

Editable setting
I>1 Status
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 Status is Enabled.
Enabled

Editable setting
I>1 Current Set
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 Current Set can be set. The
1.50 A setting range is from 0.05 to 4.00 In in steps of 0.01 In.

Editable setting
I>1 Time Dial
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 Time Dial can be set. The setting
1.00 range is from 0.01 to 100 in steps of 0.01

Note : The settings of I>2 Status, I>3 Status, IN1>1 Status, IN1>2 Status, IN1>3 Status, IN2>1 Status,
IN2>2 Status, IN2>3 Status can be set in similar manner as that of I>1 Status.

2.3.16.9.4 Edit Settings (If I>1 Function if selected for DT)


Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

P154/EN M/C 5-55


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Password protected window for Cold Load Pickup i.e. tcold Time Delay,
COLD LOAD PKP
tclp Time Delay, I>1 Status, I>2 Status, I>3 Status, IN1>1 Status, IN1>2
Status, IN1>3 Status, IN2>1 Status, IN2>2 Status and IN2>3 Status.

Editable setting
tcold Time Delay
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, tcold Time Delay can be set. The
7200 S setting range is from 0 to 14400s in steps of 1s.

Editable setting
tclp Time Delay
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, tclp Time Delay can be set. The
7200 S setting range is from 0 to 14400s in steps of 1s.

Editable setting
I>1 Status
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 Status can be Enabled / Blocked.
Enabled

Editable setting
I>1 Current Set
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 Current Set can be set. The
1.50 A setting range is from 0.05 to 4.00 In in steps of 0.01 In.

Editable setting
I>1 Time Delay
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I>1 Time Delay can be set. The
0.01 S setting range is from 0 to 100s in steps of 0.01s.

NotE: The settings of I>2 Status, I>3 Status, IN1>1 Status, IN1>2 Status, IN1>3 Status, IN2>1 Status,
IN2>2 Status, IN2>3 Status can be set in a similar manner as that of I>1 Status.

2.3.16.10 Group1 –Undercurrent Submenu

2.3.16.10.1 Edit Settings (If I< Status is disabled)


Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Undercurrent i.e. I< Status, I< and tI<.
UNDERCURRENT

P154/EN M/C 5-56


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Editable setting
I< Status
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I< Status can be Enabled /
Disabled Disabled.

2.3.16.10.2 Edit Settings (If I< Status is enabled)

Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:


GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for Undercurrent i.e. I< Status, I< and tI<.
UNDERCURRENT

Editable setting
I< Status
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I< Status is Enabled.
Enabled

Editable setting
I<
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I< settings can be set. The setting
1.00 A range is from 0.1 to 1 In in steps of 0.01 In.

Editable setting
t I<
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, t I<setting can be set. The setting
1.00 S range is from 0.2 to 100s in steps of 0.01s

2.3.16.11 Group 1 – CB Fail Submenu

2.3.16.11.1 Edit Settings (If CB Fail Status is disabled)


Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ settings:
GROUP 1
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for CB FAIL i.e. CB Fail Status, CB Fail


CB FAIL Timer, CB Reset, I<, IN<, Remove I> Start and Remove IN> Start.

Editable setting
CB Fail Status
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, CB Fail Status can be Enabled /
Disabled Disabled

P154/EN M/C 5-57


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I< can be set. The setting range is
I< from 0.05 to 3.2 In in steps of 0.01 In
1.00 A

By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN< can be set. The setting range is
IN< from 0.05 to 3.2 In in steps of 0.01 In
1.00 A

Editable setting
Remove I> Start
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Remove I> Start can be Enabled /
Disabled Disabled

Editable setting
Remove IN> Start
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Remove IN> Start can be Enabled /
Disabled Disabled

2.3.16.11.2 Edit Settings (If CB Fail Status is enabled)


Password protected window for “GROUP 1’’ setting i.e. SYSTEM
GROUP 1
CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 1 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for CB FAIL i.e. CB Fail Status, CB Fail


CB FAIL Timer, CB Reset, I<, IN<, Remove I> Start and Remove IN> Start.

Editable setting
CB Fail Status
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, CB Fail Status is Enabled.
Enabled

Editable setting
CB Fail Timer
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, CB Fail Timer can be set. The setting
0.10 S range is from 0 to 50s in steps of 0.01s.

By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, CBF Reset can be set as CB Open +
CBF Reset I<, Prot Reset + I<, CB Open, I<
CB Open+ I<

P154/EN M/C 5-58


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, I< can be set. The setting range is
I< from 0.05 to 3.2 In in steps of 0.01In
1.00 A

By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, IN< can be set. The setting range is
IN< from 0.05 to 3.2 In in steps of 0.01In
1.00 A

Editable setting
Remove I> Start
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Remove I> Start can be Enabled /
Disabled Disabled

Editable setting
Remove IN> Start
By using the (+ /5) or (- /) key, Remove IN> Start can be Enabled /
Disabled Disabled

2.3.17 Group 2 Menu

2.3.17.1 Edit Settings


Password protected window for “GROUP 2’’ settings:
GROUP 2
SYSTEM CONFIG, OVERCURRENT, NEG SEQUENCE O/C, BROKEN
CONDUCTOR, EARTH FAULT 1, EARTH FAULT 2, THERMAL
OVERLOAD, COLD LOAD PICKUP, UNDERCURRENT and CB FAIL.
Note: Group 2 Setting will be seen only when it is enabled in
Configuration setting.

Password protected window for System Configuration i.e. 2nd


SYSTEM CONFIG Harmonic Disabled/Enabled, 2ndHarm Thresh and I>lift 2H.

Password protected window for Overcurrent i.e. I>1 Function, I>2


OVERCURRENT
Function and I>3 Function. The functions can be set as Disabled / DT /
IDMT.

Password protected window for Negative Sequence O/C i.e. I2>1


NEG SEQUENCE O/C
Function, I2>2 Function and I2>3 Function. The functions can be set as
Disabled / DT / IDMT.

Password protected window for Broken Conductor i.e. BC Alarm


BROKEN CONDUCTOR (Enable/Disabled), I2/I1 Setting - 1 and I2/I1 Time Dly – 1, BC Trip
(Enable/Disabled), I2/I1 Setting - 2 and I2/I1 Time Dly - 2.

P154/EN M/C 5-59


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

Password protected window for Earth Fault 1 i.e. IN1>1 Function, IN1>2
EARTH FAULT 1 Function and IN1>3 Function. The functions can be set as Disabled / DT
/ IDMT.

Password protected window for Earth Fault 2 i.e. IN2>1 Function, IN2>2
EARTH FAULT 2 Function and IN2>3 Function. The functions can be set as Disabled / DT
/ IDMT.

Password protected window for Thermal Overload i.e. Characteristic


THERMAL OVERLOAD (Disabled/Single), Thermal Trip, Thermal Alarm, Time Constant 1 and K.

Password protected window for Cold Load Pickup i.e. tcold Time Delay,
COLD LOAD PICKUP
tclp Time Delay, I>1 Status, I>2 Status, I>3 Status, IN1>1 Status, IN1>2
Status, IN1>3 Status, IN2>1 Status, IN2>2 Status and IN2>3 Status

Password protected window for Undercurrent i.e. I< Status, I< and tI<.
UNDERCURRENT

Password protected window for CB FAIL i.e. CB Fail Status, CB Fail


CB FAIL Timer, CB Reset, I<, IN<, Remove I> Start and Remove IN> Start.

Note: The Group 2 settings for System Configuration, Over Current, Negative Sequence O/C, Broken
Conductor, Earth Fault – 1, Earth Fault – 2, Thermal Overload, Cold Load Pkp Under Current
Protection and CB Fail settings are similar to Group 1.

P154/EN M/C 5-60


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4 Configuration Flowcharts

2.4.1 Main Menu


After the Power ON or when the relay is reset the following windows will be displayed, and
the user can scroll through the main menu as below.

ID =1 P50 Agile P154


SW = V1.04 Feeder Protect’n

SYSTEM DATA
 4

VIEW RECORDS
 4

MEASUREMENTS
 4

 4

 4
CB CONTROL RECORD CONTROL DISTURBANCE REC
 4

 4

DATE AND TIME COMMUNICATION  4


COMMISSION TEST
 4

 4

 4

CONFIGURATION IO CONFIGURATION GROUP 1


 4

 4

 4

TRANS. RATIOS O/P RELAY CONFIG GROUP 2


 4

P154/EN M/A 5-61


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.2 View and Edit Settings

SYSTEM DATA

Press the Right arrow key () to enter the


setting menu.
Language
English


By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /5) or the
Minus / Down arrow key (- /) select the


desired setting.
Frequency
This window shows the set system Frequency.
50Hz

To change the System Frequency press the EDIT


EDIT Key.
As soon as the Edit Key is pressed the relay Password = 0001
will ask for Password.


By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /5) or the
Minus / Down arrow key (- /) enter the set


Password i.e. four () digits alpha numeric.
Password = 0000

Press the EDIT Key


EDIT

Password = 0000
The display will show password OK message, ** Password OK **
and display the next option.

Frequency
The Alpha Numerical value will start blinking.
50Hz

By using the Plus / Up arrow key (+ /5) or the


Minus / Down arrow key (- /) select the

desired frequency.
Frequency
0Hz
Press the EDIT Key.
EDIT

The Alpha Numerical Value will stop blinking. Frequency


0Hz

Press the Right arrow key (), the relay will


ask the user to SAVE or to CANCEL the
SET For Save
settings.
CLEAR For Cancel

Press the SET Key to SAVE the Changes. SAVE Settings SET

OR
DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Press the CLEAR Key to DISCARD the


Changes.

P154/EN M/A 5-62


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.3 View System Data Menu Settings

SYSTEM DATA
34

6
Language
English

3
3

4
4

4
Description USB Address Opto I/P 654321
P50 Agile P154 1 Status 000000
3

3
4

4
Model Number USB Parity Relay O/P 654321
P154111A1A0010A None Status 000100

3
3

3
4
4

4
Serial Number USB Baud Rate (*) CB Open/Close
xxxP154xxxx 57600 No Operation

3
3
3

4
4
4

Software Version (*) Password (*) Opto I/P

P154_1_ _ 1 _ _0V1.04 **** DC


3

3
3

4
4

(*) Frequency Active Group (*) Config Port


50Hz Group 1 USB

3
4

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET 34 EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key is used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-63


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.4 View Records Menu

2.4.4.1 View Content

VIEW RECORDS 


Fault Record



Event Record


Maint Record

Alarm Record

P154/EN M/A 5-64


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.4.2 View Fault Records

Fault Record
3 3
Fault Record
34 VIEW RECORDS
4

6
Fault Num = 1 4
I>1 I<
IN1>1 IN2>1 I2>1
4

3
3

4
Fault Num = 2 I>2
IN1>2 IN2>2 I2>2
4

3
3
3

4
4
Fault Num = 3 I>3 I1 = 0.00 A

IN1>3 IN2>3 I2>3 I2/I1 = 0.00


4

3
3
3

4
4
Fault Num = 4 S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 Thermal State
CLP BC CBF TH EXT TR 23%
4

3
3

4
Fault Num = 5 Ia = 0.00 A Trip Counter

Ib = 0.00 A 269
4

3
3

4
Ic = 0.00 A Trip Timing (Sec)

In1= 0.00 A 1.005


3
3

4
4

In2 = 0.00 A 21/02/14

I2 = 0.00 A 16:15:30:225
3
3

4
4

Note: The display windows shown in dashed lines will be seen if the relay operates for
respective protection functions.

P154/EN M/A 5-65


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.4.3 View Event Records


VIEW RECORDS

6
Fault Record

 

Event Record   Event Num = 1   Dt: 21/02/201

Tm: 16:15:0:225

 

 
Event Num = 2 Event No = 1
Power on

2.4.4.4 View Maintenance Records


VIEW RECORDS

6

Fault Record

Event Record

Maint Record   Main’t Rec Num =   Errorcode : 000

5 RTC Error

6 5

Main’t Rec Num = 07/06/201


 17:20:0:596

P154/EN M/A 5-66


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.4.5 View Alarm Records


VIEW RECORDS
4


Fault Record

 4

Event Record
 4

Maint Record
 4

Alarm Record 4  TCS Alarm 4  24/09/2014

11:24:00.842

P154/EN M/A 5-67


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.5 Measurement Menu

2.4.5.1 View Settings

MEASUREMENTS 

6
IA = 0 A

IB = 0 A

IC =0A
IN1 = 0 A

IN2 = 0 A



ia = 0.00 A TC : 269
ib = 0.00 A BOC : 257


ic = 0.00 A BOT : 0 mSec


in1 = 0.00 A Th. State : 0%


In2 = 0.00 A Irms A = 0.00 A


i1 = 0.00 A Irms B = 0.00 A


i2 = 0.00 A Irms C = 0.00 A


I2/I1 = 0.000

P154/EN M/A 5-68


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.6 CB Control Menu

2.4.6.1 View/Edit Settings (if all settings are disabled)

CB CONTROL



(*) TCS Alarm

NO


(*) CB Open S’vision


Disabled

(*) CB Open Alarm


Disabled

(*) CB Control by
Disabled

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-69


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.6.2 View/Edit Settings (if all settings are enabled)

CB CONTROL
3


(*) TCS Alarm

Yes

(*) TCS Timer 3



0.50S

3
3


(*) CB Open S’vision (*) CB Control by

Enabled Local+Remote

3
3


(*) CB Open Time (*) Close Pulse Time

0.30S 0.50S

3
3


(*) CB Open Alarm (*) Open Pulse Time

Enabled 0.50S
3
3


(*) CB Open Oper


2000

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET 3 EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-70


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.7 Date and Time Menu

2.4.7.1 View/Edit Settings (if all settings are disabled)

DATE AND TIME


Tm: 17:21:50 4 4
Dt : 12/11/14 Wed


4
(*) Local Time Enable
Disabled


4

4
(*) DST Enable (*) SET Seconds
Disabled 50


4

4
(*) RP Time Zone (*) SET Date
Local 12


4

4
(*) SET Hours (*) SET Month
17 11


4

(*) SET Minutes (*) SET Year


21 14

4
4

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET 4 EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-71


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.7.2 View/Edit Settings (if all settings are enabled)

4 DATE AND TIME


Tm: 17:21:50 34
Dt : 12/11/14 Wed

3 4
(*) Local Time Enable
Fixed

3 4
3 4

3 4
(*) Local Time Offset (*) DST Start Mins (*) SET Hours
0 Mins 60 Mins 17

3 4
3 4

3 4
(*) DST Enable (*) DST End (*) SET Minutes

Enabled Last 21

3 4

3 4
3 4

(*) DST Offset (*) DST End Day (*) SET Seconds

60 Mins Sunday 50
3 4
3 4

3 4
(*) DST Start (*) DST End Month (*) SET Date

Last October 12
3 4

3 4
3 4

(*) DST Start Day (*) DST End Mins (*) SET Month

Sunday 30 Mins 11
3 4

3 4

3 4

(*) DST Start Month (*) RP Time Zone (*) SET Year

March Local 14
3 4

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET 34 EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-72


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.8 Configuration menu

2.4.8.1 View/Edit Settings

CONFIGURATION



(*) Restore Defaults
No Operation





(*) Active Settings (*) Overcurrent (*) Cold Load Pickup

Group 1 Enabled Disabled




(*) Copy From (*) Neg Sequence O/C (*) Measure’t setup

Group 1 Disabled ABC




(*) Copy To (*) Broken Conductor (*) UnderCurr Prot

No Operation Disabled Disabled



(*) Setting Group 1 (*) Earth Fault 1 (*) CB Fail

Enabled Enabled Disabled



(*) Setting Group 2 (*) Earth Fault 2 (*) Setting Values

Disabled Enabled Secondary 



(*) System Config (*)


Thermal Overload
Disabled Disabled

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-73


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.9 Transformer Ratios Menu

2.4.9.1 View/Edit Settings

TRANS. RATIOS



(*) Phase CT Primary
100 A

 

(*) Phase CT Sec’y


1A
 

(*) E/F CT Primary


100 A
 

(*) E/F CT Secondary


1A
 

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-74


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.10 Record Control Menu

2.4.10.1 View/Edit Settings

RECORD CONTROL



(*) Clear Events
No


(*) Clear Faults


No

(*) Clear Dist Recs


No

(*) Clear Maint


No

(*) Thermal Reset


No

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-75


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.11 Communication Menu

2.4.12 View/Edit settings

COMMUNICATION


6
(*) RP1 Address
1

(*) RP1 Baud Rate


57600

(*) RP1 Parity


Even

(*) RP1 Timesync


Disabled

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-76


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.13 I/O Configuration Menu

2.4.14 View/Edit Settings

IO CONFIGURATION
4

6
(*) Relay : 654321
Gen Strt 000000
6
5

(*) LED G : 8765


Gen Strt 0000
6
5

(*) LED R : 8765


Gen Strt 0000
6
5

(*) AND Logic : DCBA


Gen Strt 0000
6
5

(*) Opto I/P : 654321


Rem. Rst. 000000

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET 4 EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-77


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.14.1.1 I/O Configuration Submenu Setting

(Output relays, LEDs and AND logic settings)

IO CONFIGURATION

Relay : 654321
Gen Strt 000000
3

3
4

4
Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321
Strt L1 000000 Strt I2>2 000000 Strt IN2>3 000000
3

3
4

4
Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321
Strt L2 000000 Strt I2>3 000000 Strt BC 000000
3

3
4

4
Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321
Strt L3 000000 Strt IN1>1 000000 THOL Alm 000000
3

3
4

Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321 Relay 4


: 654321
Strt I>1 000000 Strt IN1>2 000000 Strt CLP 000000
3

3
4

Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321


Strt I>2 000000 Strt IN1>3 000000 Strt I< 000000
3

3
4

Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321


Strt I>3 000000 Strt IN2>1 000000 Strt CBF 000000
3

3
4

Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321


Strt I2>1 000000 Strt IN2>2 000000 I> BCBF 000000
3

P154/EN M/A 5-78


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

3
4

4
Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321
IN1> BCBF 000000 Trip L3 000000 Trip IN1>2 000000

3
4

4
Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321
BC Alm 000000 Trip I>1 000000 Trip IN1>3 000000
3

3
4

4
Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321
CloseFail 000000 Trip I>2 000000 Trip IN2>1 000000
3

3
4

4
Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321
Open Fail 000000 Trip I>3 000000 Trip IN2>2 000000
3

3
4

4
Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321
Relay OK 000000 Trip I2>1 000000 Trip IN2>3 000000
3

3
4

4
Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321
Gen Trip 000000 Trip I2>2 000000 BC Trip 000000
3

3
4

Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321


Trip L1 000000 Trip I2>3 000000 THOL Trip 000000
3

3
4

Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321


Trip L2 000000 Trip IN1>1 000000 CLP 000000
3

P154/EN M/A 5-79


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

3
4

4
Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321
Trip I< 000000 OptoI/P 6 000000 CBOpn Sup 000000

3
4

4
Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321
CBF Trip 000000 AndLogicA 000000
3

3
4

4
Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321
CBOprAlm 000000 AndLogicB 000000
3

3
4

Relay : 654321 Relay 4 : 654321


OptoI/P 1 000000 AndLogicC 000000
3

3
4

Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321


OptoI/P 2 000000 AndLogicD 000000
3

3
4

Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321


OptoI/P 3 000000 CB Trip 000000
3

3
4

Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321


OptoI/P 4 000000 CB Close 000000
3

3
4

Relay : 654321 Relay : 654321


OptoI/P 5 000000 TCS Alarm 000000

P154/EN M/A 5-80


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.14.1.2 I/O Configuration Submenu Setting (Opto I/ps)

IO CONFIGURATION

4
Opto I/P : 654321 6 5
Rem. Rst. 000000

3
4

4
Opto I/P : 654321 Opto I/P : 654321 Opto I/P : 654321
CBF Init 000000 Blk I>2 000000 Blk IN1>3 000000
3

3
4

4
Opto I/P : 654321 Opto I/P : 654321 Opto I/P : 654321
Sel Grp2 000000 Blk I>3 000000 Blk IN2>1 000000
3

3
4

4
Opto I/P : 654321 Opto I/P : 654321 Opto I/P : 654321
Ext Trip 000000 Blk I2>1 000000 Blk IN2>2 000000
3

3
4

4
Opto I/P : 654321 Opto I/P : 654321 Opto I/P : 654321

/
DR Trig 000000 Blk I2>2 000000 Blk IN2>3 000000
3

3
4

4
Opto I/P : 654321 Opto I/P : 654321 Opto I/P : 654321
CB (52A) 000000 Blk I2>3 000000 Blk BC 000000
3

3
4

Opto I/P : 654321 Opto I/P : 654321 Opto I/P : 654321


CB (52B) 000000 Blk IN1>1 000000 Blk THOL 000000
3

3
4

Opto I/P : 654321 Opto I/P : 654321 Opto I/P : 654321


Blk I>1 000000 Blk IN1>2 000000 Blk I< 000000
3
4

Opto I/P : 654321


TCS Trig 000000

P154/EN M/A 5-81


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.15 O/P Relay Configuration Menu

2.4.15.1 View/Edit Settings

O/P RELAY CONFIG


34

6
(*) Contact HR/SR
000000
3
4

(*) O/P–1 Open Time


0.50 S
3

3
4

4
(*) O/P–2 Open Time (*) LED G HR/SR (*) ANDEQ B Rst Time
0.50 S 0000 1S
3

3
4

4
(*) O/P–3 Open Time (*) LED R HR/SR (*) ANDEQ C Op Time
0.50 S 0000 1S
3

3
4

4
(*) O/P–4 Open Time (*) ANDEQ A Op Time (*) ANDEQ C Rst Time
0.50 S 1S 1S
3

3
4

4
(*) O/P–5 Open Time (*) ANDEQ A Rst Time (*) ANDEQ D Op Time
0.50 S 1S 1S
3

3
4

(*) O/P–6 Open Time (*) ANDEQ B Op Time (*) ANDEQ D Rst Time
0.50 S 1S 1S
3
4

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET 34 EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-82


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.16 Disturbance Record Menu

2.4.16.1 View/Edit Settings

(*) Trigger Position  


DISTURBANCE REC
50 %

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-83


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.17 Commissioning Test Menu

2.4.17.1 View/Edit Settings

COMMISSION TEST



(*) Test Mode
Disabled


(*) Test Pattern


000000

(*) Contact Test


No Operation

(*) Test LEDs


No Operation

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-84


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.18 Group1 Menu

2.4.18.1 View/Edit Settings

GROUP 1 


SYSTEM CONFIG

 

OVERCURRENT
 

 
NEG SEQUENCE O/C THERMAL OVERLOAD
 

BROKEN CONDUCTOR
 
COLD LOAD PICKUP
 
 

EARTH FAULT 1 UNDER CURRENT


 
 

EARTH FAULT 2 CB FAIL


 

Note:
Only those Protection Function which are
enabled in CONFIGURATION setting are
seen in GROUP 1 Setting.

P154/EN M/A 5-85


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.18.2 Group1 System Configuration Submenu

2.4.18.2.1 View/Edit Settings (If the setting is disabled)

(*) 2nd Harmonic SYSTEM CONFIG GROUP 1


   
Disabled 

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

2.4.18.2.2 View/Edit Settings (If the setting is enabled)

2nd Harmonic   SYSTEM CONFIG   GROUP 1

Enabled 

(*) 2nd Harm Thresh


20%

(*) I>lift 2H
10.00 A

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-86


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.18.3 Group1 Overcurrent Submenu

2.4.18.3.1 View/Edit Settings (If the setting is disabled)

3  OVER CURRENT 3- - - GROUP 1


(*) I>1 Function

Disabled

3

(*) I>2 Function
Disabled

3

(*) I>3 Function


Disabled
3

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-87


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.18.3.2 View/Edit Settings (For all types of IEC curves)

I>1 Function   OVER CURRENT GROUP 1


- - -
IEC S Inverse 


(*) I>1 Current Set
1.00 A



(*) I>1 TMS
1.000

(*) I>1 Reset Char


DT

(*) I>1 tRESET


1.00 S

(*) I>1 2H Blocking


Disabled

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-88


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.18.3.3 View/Edit Settings (For all types of IEEE curves)

I>1 Function   - - -
OVER CURRENT GROUP 1
IEEE M Inverse 


I>1 Current Set
1.00 A

 
(*) I>1 Time Dial
1.00
 

 
(*) (*)
I>1 Reset Char I>1 Reset Char
DT IDMT
 

 
(*) I>1 tRESET (*) I>1 RTMS
1.00 S 1.000
 

 

(*) I>1 2H Blocking (*) I>1 2H Blocking


Disabled Disabled
 

 

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: The display windows shown in dashed lines will be seen if the I>1 Reset Char is
selected as IDMT.

(*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings
section.

P154/EN M/A 5-89


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.18.3.4 View/Edit Settings (For DT)

I>1 Function   - - -
OVER CURRENT GROUP 1
DT 


(*) I>1 Current Set
1.00 A



(*) I>1 Time Delay
1.00 S

(*) I>1 Reset Char


DT

(*) I>1 tRESET


1.00 S

(*) I>1 2H Blocking


Disabled

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-90


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.19 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Menu

2.4.19.1 View/Edit Settings (If setting is disabled)

  NEG SEQUENCE O/C - - - GROUP 1


(*) I2>1 Function

Disabled

 
(*) I2>2 Function
Disabled

 

(*) I2> Function


Disabled
 

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-91


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.19.2 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for IEC curve)

I2>1 Function   - - -
NEG SEQUENCE O/C GROUP 1
IEC S Inverse 


(*) I2>1 Current Set
1.00 A

(*) I2>1 TMS 



1.000

(*) I2>1 Reset Char


DT

(*) I2>1 tRESET


1.00 S

(*) I2>1 2H Blocking


Disabled

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-92


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.19.3 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for IEEE curve)

I2>1 Function   - - -
NEG SEQUENCE O/C GROUP 1
IEEE M Inverse 


(*) I2>1 Current Set
1.00 A

(*) 

I2>1 Time Dial
1.00



(*) I2>1 Reset Char (*) I2>1 Reset Char
DT IDMT



(*) I2>1 tRESET (*) I2>1 RTMS
1.00 S 1.000


(*) I2>1 2H Blocking (*) I2>1 2H Blocking


Disabled Disabled


(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: The display windows shown in dashed lines will be seen if the I2>1 Reset Char is
selected as IDMT.

(*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings
section.

P154/EN M/A 5-93


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.19.4 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for DT)

I2>1 Function   - - -
NEG SEQUENCE O/C GROUP 1
DT 


(*) I2>1 Current Set
1.00 A

(*) 

I2>1 Time Delay
1.00 S

(*) I2>1 Reset Char


DT

(*) I2>1 tRESET


1.00 S

(*) I2>1 2H Blocking


Disabled

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-94


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.20 Broken Conductor Menu

2.4.20.1 View/Edit Settings (If setting is disabled)

(*) BC Alarm   - - -
BROKEN CONDUCTOR GROUP 1
Disabled

 
(*) BC Trip
Disabled

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-95


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.20.2 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled)

- - -
BROKEN CONDUCTOR GROUP 1


(*) (*)
BC Alarm I2/I1Set-1

Enabled 0.50

 

(*)
I2/I1 Time Dly-1
10.00S

(*) (*)
BC Trip I2/I1Set-2

Enabled 0.50

 
(*)
I2/I1 Time Dly-2
10.00S

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-96


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.21 Group 1- Earth Fault 1 Submenu

2.4.21.1 View/Edit Settings (If setting is disabled)

  EARTH FAULT 1 - - - GROUP 1


Measured

 
(*) IN1>1Function
Disabled
 

(*) IN1>2Function
Disabled
 

(*) IN1>Function
Disabled
 

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-97


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.21.2 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for IEC curve)

Measured EARTH FAULT 1 GROUP 1


  - - -



(*) IN1>1 Function
IEC S Inverse


(*) IN1>1 Current Set
1.00 A

(*) IN1>1 TMS


1.000

(*) IN1>1 Reset Char


DT

(*) IN1>1 tRESET


1.00 S

(*) IN1>1 2H Blocking


Disabled

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-98


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.21.3 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for IEEE curve)

Measured   - - -
EARTH FAULT 1 GROUP 1



(*) IN1>1 Function
IEEE M Inverse

(*) 
IN1>1 Current Set
1.00 A

(*) IN1>1 Time Dial


1.00



(*)
(*) IN1>1 Reset Char IN1>1 Reset Char
DT IDMT


(*) IN1>1 tRESET (*) IN1>1 RTMS


1.00 S 1.000


(*) IN1>1 2H Blocking (*) IN1>1 2H Blocking


Disabled Disabled


(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: The display windows shown in dashed lines will be seen if the IN1>1 Reset Char is
selected as IDMT.

(*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings
section.

P154/EN M/A 5-99


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.21.4 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for DT)

Measured   - - -
EARTH FAULT 1 GROUP 1



(*) IN1>1 Function
DT


(*) IN1>1 Current Set
1.00 A

(*) IN1>1 Time Delay


1.00 S

(*) IN1>1 Reset Char


DT

(*) IN1>1 tRESET


1.00 S

(*) IN1>1 2H Blocking


Disabled

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-100


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.22 Group 1-Earth Fault 2 Submenu

2.4.22.1 View/Edit Settings (If setting is disabled)

  EARTH FAULT 2 - - - GROUP 1


Derived



(*) IN2>1Function
Disabled

(*) IN2>2Function
Disabled

(*) IN2>Function
Disabled

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-101


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.22.2 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for IEC curve)

Derived   - - -
EARTH FAULT 2 GROUP 1

 
(*) IN2>1 Function
IEC S Inverse

(*) 
IN2>1 Current Set
1.00 A
 

(*) IN2>1 TMS


1.000
 

(*)
IN2>1 Reset Char
DT
 

(*)
IN2>1 tRESET
1.00 S
 

(*) IN2>1 2H Blocking


Disabled
 

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-102


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.22.3 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for IEEE curve)

Derived  
EARTH FAULT 2
- - - GROUP 1

 
(*) IN2>1 Function
IEEE M Inverse


(*) IN2>1 Current Set
1.00 A
 

(*) IN2>1 Time Dial


1.00
 

 
(*)
IN2>1 Reset Char (*) IN2>1 Reset Char
DT IDMT
 

 

(*)
IN2>1 tRESET (*) IN2>1 RTMS
1.00 S 1.000
 

 

(*) IN2>1 2H Blocking (*) IN2>1 2H Blocking


Disabled Disabled
 

 

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: The display windows shown in dashed lines will be seen if the IN2>1 Reset Char is
selected as IDMT.

(*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings
section.

P154/EN M/A 5-103


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.22.4 View/Edit Settings (If setting is enabled for DT)

Derived - - -
  EARTH FAULT 2 GROUP 1



(*) IN2>1 Function
DT

(*) 
IN2>1 Current Set
1.00 A

(*) IN2>1 Time Delay


1.00 S

(*) IN2>1 Reset Char


DT

(*) IN2>1 tRESET


1.00 S

(*) IN2>1 2H Blocking


Disabled

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-104


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.23 Group 1- Thermal Overload Submenu

2.4.23.1 View/Edit Settings (If Characteristics is disabled)

(*) Characteristic   - - -
THERMAL OVERLOAD GROUP 1
Disabled 

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

2.4.23.2 View/Edit Settings (If Characteristics is set as Single)

Characteristic   - - -
THERMAL OVERLOAD GROUP 1
Single 

(*) Thermal Trip


1.00 A

(*) Thermal Alarm


70 %

(*) Time Constant 1


10

(*) K
1.05

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings
CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-105


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.24 Group 1- Cold Load Pickup Submenu

2.4.24.1 View/Edit Settings

COLD LOAD PKP


- - - GROUP 1


(*) tcold Time Delay
7200 S 



(*) tclp Time Delay (*) IN1>2 Status
7200 S Enabled



(*) I>1 Status (*) IN1> Status


Enabled Enabled



(*) I>2 Status (*) IN2>1 Status


Enabled Enabled



(*) I>2 Status (*) IN2>2 Status


Enabled Enabled


(*) IN1>1 Status (*) IN2> Status


Enabled Enabled

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-106


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.24.2 View/Edit Settings (I>1 Function)

COLD LOAD PKP


- - - GROUP 1


(*)

tcold Time Delay


7200 S

 
(*)

tclp Time Delay


7200 S
 

(*)

I>1 Status
Enabled

NOTE: NOTE: NOTE:


If the IEC Curve is selected If the IEEE Curve is selected If the DT Curve is selected
for Over Current Protection for Over Current Protection for Over Current Protection
setting. setting. setting.

(*) I>1 Current Set  (*) I>1 Current Set  (*) I>1 Current Set 
1.00 A 1.00 A 1.00 A
 

 
 

(*) I>1 TMS (*) I>1 Time Dial (*) I>1 Time Delay
1.000 1.00 1.00 S
 

 
 

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: The settings of I>2 Status, I>3 Status, IN1>1 Status, IN1>2 Status, IN1>3 Status, IN2>1
Status, IN2>2 Status, IN2>3 Status can be set in similar manner as that of I>1 Status.

(*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings
section.

P154/EN M/A 5-107


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.25 Group 1- Undercurrent Submenu

2.4.25.1 View/Edit Settings (If I< Status is disabled)

(*) I< Status   - - -


UNDER CURRENT GROUP 1
Disabled 

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

2.4.25.2 View/Edit Settings (If I< Status is enabled)

I< Status   - - -
UNDER CURRENT GROUP 1
Enabled 

(*) I<
1.00 A
 

(*) t I<
1.00 S
 

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

P154/EN M/A 5-108


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.26 Group 1- CB Fail Submenu

2.4.26.1 View/Edit Settings (If CB FAIL Status is disabled)

CB FAIL
- - - GROUP 1



(*)

CB Fail Status
Disabled

(*) I<
1.00 A

(*) IN<
1.00 A

(*) Remove I> Start


Enabled

(*) Remove IN> Start


Enabled

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-109


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.26.2 View/Edit Settings (If CB FAIL Status is enabled)

CB FAIL
- - - GROUP 1



(*)

CB Fail Status
Enabled



(*) (*) CB Fail Timer
I<
1.00 A 0.10S



(*) (*) CB Reset


IN<
1.00 A CB Open



(*) Remove I> Start


Enabled

(*) Remove IN> Start


Enabled

(*)
SET For Save
SAVE Settings SET  EDIT
CLEAR For Cancel

DISCARD Settings CLEAR

Note: (*) indicates Edit key used to modify settings. Refer to the View and Edit settings section.

P154/EN M/A 5-110


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

2.4.27 Group 2 Menu

2.4.27.1 View/Edit Settings

GROUP 2 


SYSTEM CONFIG


OVERCURRENT



NEG SEQ O/C THERMAL OVERLOAD



BROKEN CONDUCTOR COLD LOAD PICKUP


EARTH FAULT – 1 UNDER CURRENT




EARTH FAULT – 2 CB FAIL



Note:
Only those Protection Function which are
enabled in CONFIGURATION setting are
seen in GROUP 2 Settings.

P154/EN M/A 5-111


P50 Agile P154 5 Configuration

P154/EN M/A 5-112


P50 Agile P154 6 Protection Functions

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

CHAPTER 6

P154/EN M/C 6-1


6 Protection Functions P50 Agile P154

6-2 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 6 Protection Functions

1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter consists of the following sections:

1 Chapter Overview
2 Protection functions
2.1 Overcurrent Protection Principles
2.1.1 IDMT Characteristics
2.1.2 Principle of Protection Function Implementation
2.1.3 Timer Hold Facility/Reset Characteristics
2.2 Phase Overcurrent Protection
2.2.1 Phase Overcurrent Protection Implementation
2.3 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection
2.3.1 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection Implementation

2.3.2 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection Logic


2.4 Earth Fault Protection
2.4.1 Earth Fault Protection Elements
2.4.2 Earth Fault Protection Logic
2.5 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection
2.5.1 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ordering option)
2.6 Restricted Earth Fault Protection
2.6.1 Restricted Earth Fault implementation
2.6.2 Application Note
2.6.2.1 High Impedance REF
2.7 Thermal Overload Function
2.7.1 Thermal Overload Protection Implementation
2.8 Broken Conductor
2.8.1 Broken Conductor Protection Implementation
2.8.2 Broken Conductor Protection Logic
2.9 Undercurrent /Loss of Power Protection Function
2.10 Circuit Breaker Fail Protection
2.10.1 Circuit Breaker Fail Implementation
2.10.2 Circuit Breaker Fail Logic
2.11 Cold Load Pickup Function
2.11.1 Cold Load Pickup Logic
2.11.2 Cold Load Pickup for SWITCH ONTO FAULT Condition
2.12 Inrush Current Blocking Function (2ND Harm Blocking)
2.12.1 Second Harmonic Blocking Implementation

P154/EN M/C 6-3


6 Protection Functions P50 Agile P154

2 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

2.1 Overcurrent Protection Principles


Most power system faults result in an overcurrent of some kind. It is the job of protection devices,
formerly known as relays but now known as Intelligent Electronic Devices (IEDs), to protect the power
system from such faults. The general principle is to isolate the faults as quickly as possible to limit the
danger and prevent unwanted fault currents flowing through systems, which can cause severe
damage to equipment and systems. At the same time, we wish to switch off only the parts of the grid
that are absolutely necessary, to prevent unnecessary blackouts. The protection devices that control
the tripping of the grid's circuit breakers are highly sophisticated electronic units, providing an array of
functionality to cover the different fault scenarios for a multitude of applications.
The described products offer a range of overcurrent protection functions including:

• Phase Overcurrent protection


• Earth Fault Overcurrent protection
• Negative Sequence Overcurrent protection
• Sensitive Earth Fault protection
• Restricted Earth Fault protection
To ensure that only the necessary circuit breakers are tripped and that these are tripped with the
smallest possible delay, the IEDs in the protection scheme need to co-ordinate with each other.
Various methods are available to achieve correct co-ordination between IEDs in a system.
These are:

• By means of time alone


• By means of current alone
• By means of a combination of both time and current.
Grading by means of current is only possible where there is an appreciable difference in fault level
between the two locations where the devices are situated. Grading by time is used by some utilities
but can often lead to excessive fault clearance times at or near source substations where the fault
level is highest. For these reasons the most commonly applied characteristic in co-ordinating
overcurrent devices is the IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum Time) type.
The relay is designed for three stages programmable OC and EF functions. All three stages of
overcurrent and earth fault protection function are programmable as Inverse Definite Minimum Time
(IDMT) or Definite Time (DT) delay.

2.1.1 IDMT Characteristics


All three stages of Overcurrent and Earth fault functions are programmable as per IDMT characteristic
based on IEC and IEEE standards. The inverse time delay is calculated with the following
mathematical formula:

K
α
+L
t= T*
I
-1
Is

6-4 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 6 Protection Functions

where;
t: Operation time
K: Constant (see the table)
I: Measured current
Is: Current threshold setting
α: Constant (see the table)
L: ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC curve)
T: Time multiplier setting (TMS) for IEC curves or Time dial setting (TD) for IEEE curves
Description Standard K α L
Define Time DT - - 0
Standard Inverse IEC 0.14 0.02 0
Standard Inverse(1.3sec) --- 0.06 0.02 0
Very Inverse IEC 13.5 1 0
Extremely inverse IEC 80 2 0
Long Time Inverse UK 120 1 0
Moderate Inverse IEEE 0.0515 0.02 0.114
Very Inverse IEEE 19.61 2 0.491
Extremely Inverse IEEE 28.2 2 0.1217
US Inverse CO8 5.95 2 0.18
US Short Time Inverse CO2 0.02394 0.02 0.01694

2.1.2 Principle of Protection Function Implementation


An energising quantity is a current input from a system current transformer or another quantity derived
from the current input. The energising quantities are extracted from the power system and presented
to the IED in the form of analogue signals. These analogue signals are then converted to digital
quantities where they can be processed by the IEDs internal processor.
In general, an energising quantity is compared with a threshold value, which may be settable or hard-
coded depending on the function. If the quantity exceeds (for overvalues) or falls short of (for
undervalues) the threshold, a signal is produced, which when gated with the various inhibit and
blocking functions becomes the Start signal for that protection function. This Start signal is generally
made available to Fixed Scheme logic for further processing. It is also passed through a timer function
to produce the Trip signal. The timer function may be an IDMT curve, or a Definite Time delay,
depending on the function. The timer can be configured by a range of settings to define such
parameters as the type of curve, The Time Multiplier Setting, the IDMT constants and Definite Time
delay.
In P154 there are several independent stages for each of the functions. All the stages (1, 2 and 3) can
be set for DT/IDMT timer function. If the DT time delay is set to '0', then the function is known to be
"instantaneous". In many instances the term “instantaneous protection” is used loosely to describe
Definite Time protection stages even when the stage may not theoretically be instantaneous.

2.1.3 Timer Hold Facility/Reset Characteristics


This feature may be useful in certain applications, such as when grading with upstream
electromechanical overcurrent relays, which have inherent reset time delays. If you set the hold timer
to a value other than zero, the resetting of the protection element timers will be delayed for this period.
This allows the element to behave in a similar way to an electromechanical relay. If you set the hold
timer to zero, the overcurrent timer for that stage will reset instantaneously as soon as the current falls
below a specified percentage of the current setting (typically 95%).

P154/EN M/C 6-5


6 Protection Functions P50 Agile P154

Another possible situation where the timer hold facility may be used to reduce fault clearance times is
for intermittent faults. An example of this may occur in a plastic insulated cable. In this application it is
possible for the fault energy to melt and reseal the cable insulation, thereby extinguishing the fault.
This process repeats to give a succession of fault current pulses, each of increasing duration with
reducing intervals between the pulses, until the fault becomes permanent.
When the reset time is instantaneous, the device will repeatedly reset and not be able to trip until the
fault becomes permanent. By using the Timer Hold facility the device will integrate the fault current
pulses, thereby reducing fault clearance time.
The timer hold facility is available to all three stages of OC and EF functions.
The Definite Time Reset characteristic is applicable for IEC curves / DT.
The value of the Reset Timer depends on the type of the timer associated to the pick-up phase (Earth)
threshold.
Type of timer associated with phase (earth)
Reset Timer
threshold
DT Reset Characteristic IDMT Reset Characteristic
- For DT time delay 0 – 100 sec Not available
- For IDMT IEC time delay 0 – 100 sec Not available
- For IDMT IEEE or CO time delay 0 – 100 sec Based on RTMS value
(0.025-1.2)

The mathematical formula applicable to the five curves is:


t= RTMS x K
--------------------
1- (I / Is) α
Where:

t = Reset time
K = Factor (see table)
I = Value of the measured current
Is = Value of the programmed threshold (pick-up value)
α = Factor (see table)
RTMS Reset time multiplier (RTMS) setting is between 0.025 and 1.2

Description Standard K α
Moderate Inverse IEEE 4.85 2
Very Inverse IEEE 21.6 2
Extremely Inverse IEEE 29.1 2
US Inverse CO8 5.95 2
US Short Time Inverse CO2 2.261 2

2.2 Phase Overcurrent Protection


Phase current faults are faults where fault current flows between two or more phases of a three-phase
power system. The fault current may be between the phase conductors only or, between two or more
phase conductors and earth. There are three types of phase fault:

• Line to Line (accounting for approximately 8% of all faults)

6-6 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 6 Protection Functions

• Line to Line to Earth (accounting for approximately 5% of all faults)


• Line to Line to Line (accounting for approximately 2% of all faults)
Although not as common as earth faults (single line to earth), phase faults are typically more severe.
An example of a phase fault is where a fallen tree branch bridges two or more phases of an overhead
line.

2.2.1 Phase Overcurrent Protection Implementation


Phase Overcurrent Protection is implemented in the OVERCURRENT column of the relevant settings
group.
The product provides three stages of three-phase overcurrent protection with independent time delay
characteristics. All settings apply to all three phases but are independent for each of the three stages.
Stages 1, 2 and 3 provide a choice of operate and reset characteristics, where you can select
between:

• A range of standard IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum Time) curves


• DT (Definite Time)
This is achieved using the cells

• I>(n) Function for the overcurrent operate characteristic


• I>(n) Reset Char for the overcurrent reset characteristic
where (n) is the number of the stage.
The IDMT-capable stages, (1, 2 and 3) also provide a Timer Hold facility. This is configured using the
cells I>(n) tRESET, where (n) is the number of the stage. Timer Hold facility is applicable for both IEC
and IEEE curves. IEEE & US curves have IDMT reset curve option in addition to DT Phase
Overcurrent protection logic.
Phase Overcurrent modules are level detectors that detect when the current magnitude exceeds a set
threshold. When this happens, the Phase Overcurrent module in question issues a signal to produce
the Start signal. This Start signal is applied to the IDMT/DT timer module. It is also made available
directly to the user for use in the logic functions.
There are three Phase Overcurrent Modules, one for each phase. The three Start signals from each
of these phases and common Start signal for each stage of phase overcurrent function is available for
customer use.
The outputs of the IDMT/DT timer modules are the trip signals which are used to drive the tripping
output relay. The three Trip signals from each of the phases and common Trip signal for each stage
of phase overcurrent function is available for customer use.
The Phase overcurrent trip signal can be blocked by:
• The Second Harmonic blocking function which is for all three phases. The blocking is
activated by setting the I> (n) 2H Blocking cell to ‘Enabled’, where (n) is the number of the
stage.
• User defined blocking logic using ‘IO Mask’ functionality.
The Phase Overcurrent threshold setting can be influenced by the Cold Load Pickup (CLP) function, if
this functionality is available and used.

2.3 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection


When applying standard phase overcurrent protection, the overcurrent elements must be set
significantly higher than the maximum load current, thereby limiting the element’s sensitivity. Most
protection schemes also use an earth fault element operating from residual current, which improves
sensitivity for earth faults.

P154/EN M/C 6-7


6 Protection Functions P50 Agile P154

However, certain faults may arise which can remain undetected by such schemes. Negative
Sequence Overcurrent elements can be used in such cases.
Any unbalanced fault condition will produce a negative sequence current component. Therefore, a
negative phase sequence overcurrent element can be used for both phase-to-phase and phase-to-
earth faults.
Negative Sequence Overcurrent protection offers the following advantages:

• Negative phase sequence overcurrent elements are more sensitive to resistive phase-to-phase
faults, where phase overcurrent elements may not operate.
• In certain applications, residual current may not be detected by an earth fault element due to the
system configuration. For example, an earth fault element applied on the delta side of a delta-
star transformer is unable to detect earth faults on the star side. However, negative sequence
current will be present on both sides of the transformer for any fault condition, irrespective of the
transformer configuration. Therefore, a negative phase sequence overcurrent element may be
used to provide time-delayed back-up protection for any uncleared asymmetrical faults
downstream.
• Where rotating machines are protected by fuses, loss of a fuse produces a large amount of
negative sequence current. This is a dangerous condition for the machine due to the heating
effect of negative phase sequence current. An upstream negative phase sequence overcurrent
element could therefore be applied to provide back-up protection for dedicated motor protection
relays.
• It may be sufficient to simply trigger an alarm to indicate the presence of negative phase
sequence currents on the system. Operators may then investigate the cause of the imbalance.

2.3.1 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection Implementation


Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection is implemented in the NEG SEQUENCE O/C column of
the relevant settings group.
The product provides three stages of negative sequence overcurrent protection with independent time
delay characteristics.
Stages 1, 2 and 3 provide a choice of operate and reset characteristics, where you can select
between:

• A range of standard IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum Time) curves


• DT (Definite Time)

This is achieved using the cells

• I2>(n) Function for the overcurrent operate characteristic


• I>(n) Reset Char for the overcurrent reset characteristic
where (n) is the number of the stage.
The IDMT-capable stages, (1, 2 and 3) also provide a Timer Hold facility. This is configured using the
cells I2>(n) tRESET, where (n) is the number of the stage. Timer Hold facility is applicable for both
IEC and IEEE curves. IEEE & US curves have IDMT reset curve option in addition to DT.

2.3.2 Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection Logic


For Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent Protection, the energising quantity I2> is compared with
the threshold current I2>(n) Current Set. If the value exceeds this setting a Start signal (Strt I2>(n)) is
generated, provided there are no blocks. 5% hysteresis is built into the comparator such that the drop-
off value is 0.95 x of the current set threshold.

6-8 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 6 Protection Functions

The Strt I2>(n) signal is fed into a timer to produce the Trip I2>(n) signal.
The Negative Sequence overcurrent trip signal can be blocked by:

• The Second Harmonic blocking function which is for all three phases. The blocking is activated
by setting the I2> (n) 2H Blocking cell to ‘Enabled’, where (n) is the number of the stage.
• User defined blocking logic using ‘IO Mask’ functionality.

2.4 Earth Fault Protection


Earth faults are simply overcurrent faults where the fault current flows to earth (as opposed to between
phases). They are the most common type of fault. There are a few different kinds of earth fault, but the
most common is the single phase-to-earth fault. Consequently this is the first and foremost type of
fault that protection devices must cover.
Typical settings for earth fault IEDs are around 30-40% of the full load current. If greater sensitivity is
required, then Sensitive Earth Fault should be used.
Earth faults can be measured directly from the system by means of:

• A separate CT located in a power system earth connection


• A separate Core Balance CT (CBCT)
• A residual connection of the three line CTs, whereby the Earth faults can be derived
mathematically by summing the three measured phase currents.
Depending on the device model, it will provide one or more of the above means for Earth fault
protection.

2.4.1 Earth Fault Protection Elements


Earth fault protection is implemented in the columns EARTH FAULT 1 and EARTH FAULT 2 of the
relevant settings group.
Each column contains an identical set of elements, whereby the EARTH FAULT 1 (IN1) column is
used for earth fault current that is measured directly from the system, whilst the EARTH FAULT 2
(IN2) column contains cells, which operate from a residual current quantity that is derived internally
from the summation of the three-phase currents.
The product provides three stages of Earth Fault protection with independent time delay
characteristics, for each EARTH FAULT column.
Stages 1, 2 and 3 provide a choice of operate and reset characteristics, where you can select
between:

• A range of standard IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum Time) curves


• DT (Definite Time)
For the IN1 column, this is achieved using the cells:

• IN1>(n) Function for the overcurrent operate characteristics


• I>(n) Reset Char for the overcurrent reset characteristic
For the IN2 column, this is achieved using the cells:

• IN2>(n) Function for the overcurrent operate characteristics


• I>(n) Reset Char for the overcurrent reset characteristic
where (n) is the number of the stage.
Stages 1, 2 and 3 provide a Timer Hold facility. This is configured using the cells IN1>(n) tRESET for
Earth Fault 1 and IN2>(n) tRESET for Earth Fault 2.

P154/EN M/C 6-9


6 Protection Functions P50 Agile P154

The fact that both EF1 and EF2 elements may be enabled at the same time leads to a number of
application advantages.

2.4.2 Earth Fault Protection Logic


The Earth Fault current is compared with a set threshold (IN1>(n) Current Set) for each stage. If it
exceeds this threshold, a Start signal is triggered, provided there are no blocks.
Earth Fault protection can follow the same IDMT characteristics as described in the Overcurrent
Protection Principles section. Please refer to this section for details of IDMT characteristics.
The description also applies to the Earth Fault 2 element (IN2).
The Earth Fault protection trip signal can be blocked by:

• The Second Harmonic blocking function which is for all three phases. The blocking of Earth
Fault 1 is activated by setting the IN1> (n) 2H Blocking cell to ‘Enabled’ and blocking of Earth
Fault 2 is activated by setting the IN2> (n) 2H Blocking cell to ‘Enabled’, where (n) is the
number of the stage.
• User defined blocking logic using ‘IO Mask’ functionality.

2.5 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection


With some earth faults, the fault current flowing to earth is limited by either intentional resistance (as is
the case with some HV systems) or unintentional resistance (e.g. in very dry conditions and where the
substrate is high resistance, such as sand or rock).
To provide protection in such cases, it is necessary to provide an earth fault protection system with a
setting that is considerably lower than for normal line protection. Such sensitivity cannot be provided
with conventional CTs, therefore SEF would normally be fed from a core balance current transformer
(CBCT) mounted around the three phases of the feeder cable. Also a special measurement class SEF
transformer should be used in the IED.
With SEF protection, settings as low as 0.2% can be used

2.5.1 Sensitive Earth Fault Protection (ordering option)


Sensitive Earth Fault protection is an ordering option and is implemented in the EARTH FAULT 1
column of the relevant settings group.
The product provides three stages of SEF protection with independent time delay characteristics.
Stages 1, 2 and 3 provide a choice of operate and reset characteristics, where you can select
between:

• A range of standard IDMT (Inverse Definite Minimum Time) curves


• DT (Definite Time)

This is achieved using the cells

• IN1>(n) Function for the overcurrent operate characteristic


• I>(n) Reset Char for the overcurrent reset characteristic
where (n) is the number of the stage.
Stages 1, 2 and 3 also provide a Timer Hold facility. This is configured using the cells
IN1>(n) tRESET.

6-10 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 6 Protection Functions

2.6 Restricted Earth Fault Protection


Winding-to-core faults in a transformer are quite common due to insulation breakdown. Such faults
can have very low fault currents, but they are faults nevertheless and have to be picked up, as they
can still severely damage expensive equipment. Often the fault currents are even lower than the
nominal load current. Clearly, neither overcurrent nor percentage differential protection is sufficiently
sensitive in this case. We therefore require a different type of protection arrangement. Not only should
the protection arrangement be sensitive, but it must create a protection zone, which is limited to the
transformer windings. Restricted Earth Fault (REF) protection satisfies these conditions.
The first figure shows an REF protection arrangement for the delta side of a delta-star transformer.
The current transformers measuring the currents in each phase are connected in parallel. A fault
outside the protection zone (i.e. outside the delta winding) will not result in a spill current, as the fault
current would simply circulate in the delta windings. However, if any of the three delta windings were
to develop a fault, the impedance of the faulty winding would change and that would result in a
mismatch between the phase currents, resulting in a spill current, sufficient to trigger a trip command.

Load

REF
IED protection zone

V00620

Figure 1: REF protection for delta side

The second figure shows an REF protection arrangement for the star side of a delta-star transformer.
Here we have a similar arrangement of current transformers connected in parallel. The only difference
is that we need to measure the zero sequence current in the neutral line as well. We know that an
external unbalanced fault causes zero sequence current to flow through the neutral line, resulting in
uneven currents in the phases, which would cause the IED to maloperate. By measuring this zero
sequence current and placing the current transformer in parallel with the other three, the currents are
balanced up resulting in stable operation.
Now only a fault inside the star winding can create an imbalance sufficient to cause the IED to issue a
trip command.

REF
protection zone

Load

IED

V00621

Figure 2: REF protection for star side

P154/EN M/C 6-11


6 Protection Functions P50 Agile P154

The Relay uses High Impedance technique for REF. The high impedance technique ensures that the
circuit is of sufficiently high impedance such that the differential voltage that may occur under external
fault conditions is less than that required to drive setting current through the device.

2.6.1 Restricted Earth Fault implementation


There is no dedicated setting for REF. When P154 relay is ordered with SEF option, IN1 element
should be used for REF function.

Note: While using REF function, SEF cannot be used and vice versa.

2.6.2 Application Note

2.6.2.1 High Impedance REF


The high impedance principle is best explained by considering a differential scheme where one CT is
saturated for an external fault, as shown below.

Healthy CT Saturated CT
Protected
circuit

Ph-G
Zm1 Zm2
I = Is + IF
RCT1 RCT2

I IF

RL1 IS RL3

Vs RST

R
RL2 RL4

V00671

Figure 3: High Impedance principle

If the IED circuit has a very high impedance, the secondary current produced by the healthy CT will
flow through the saturated CT. If CT magnetising impedance of the saturated CT is considered to be
negligible, the maximum voltage across the circuit will be equal to the secondary fault current
multiplied by the connected impedance, (RL3 + RL4 + RCT2).
The IED can be made stable for this maximum applied voltage by increasing the overall impedance of
the circuit, such that the resulting current through it is less than its current setting. As the impedance of
the IED input alone is relatively low, a series connected external resistor is required. The value of this
resistor, RST, is calculated by the formula shown. An additional non-linear, Metrosil, may be required
to limit the peak secondary circuit voltage during internal fault conditions.
Voltage across REF element Vs = IF (RCT2 + RL3 + RL4)
Stabilising resistor RST = Vs/Is –RR
where:

• IF = maximum secondary through fault current

6-12 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 6 Protection Functions

• RR = device burden
• RCT = CT secondary winding resistance
• RL2 and RL3 = Resistances of leads from the device to the current transformer
• RST = Stabilising resistor

To ensure that the protection will operate quickly during an internal fault, the CTs used to operate the
protection must have a knee-point voltage of at least 4 Vs.
The necessary connections for high impedance REF are as follows:

Figure 4: High Impedance REF connection

2.7 Thermal Overload Function


The heat generated within an item of plant, such as a cable or a transformer, is the resistive loss
2
(I Rt). The thermal time characteristic is therefore based on the square of the current integrated over
time. The device automatically uses the largest phase current for input to the thermal model.
The equipment is designed to operate continuously at a temperature corresponding to its full load
rating, where the heat generated is balanced with heat dissipated. Over-temperature conditions occur
when currents in excess of their maximum rating are allowed to flow for a period of time. It is known
that temperature changes during heating follow exponential time constants.
The device provides single time constant characteristic which is used to protect cables, dry type
transformers (e.g. type AN), and capacitor banks.
Thermal overload protection is designed to prevent the electrical equipment when operating
temperature is exceeded the maximum designed temperature. The fundamental currents are
measured and analysed to monitor the thermal state. In case of thermal overload function the
calculation of the Time to Trip is given by:
t = τ ln ((K²- A)/ (K²- Th. Trip))

Where:
t: Time to trip (in seconds)
τ: Thermal time constant (Te, in seconds) of the equipment to be protected
K: Thermal overload equal to (Irms/ k* IFL)

P154/EN M/C 6-13


6 Protection Functions P50 Agile P154

Where:

Irms: RMS current corresponding to the largest phase current


IFL: Thermal Trip or full load current rating (settable)
k: Settable (1 to 1.5 step 0.01)

A: Initial thermal state. If the initial thermal state is 50% then A =0.5
Th. Trip: Trip thermal state. If the trip thermal state is set at 100%, then Th. Trip is 1
The calculation of the thermal state is given by the following formula:
Θi+1 = (Irms /k*IFLA) ² · [1 – exp (-t/Te)] + Θi · exp (-t/Te)

TRIPPING CURVE FUNCTION OF THE PREFAULT LOAD (K = 1.1 & Te = 10 Mins)

10000.00

1000.00

100.00
TIME IN SEC

10.00

1.00

0.10
1 MULTIPLES OF THERMAL THRESHOLD SETTINGS Iθ> 10
A: No. of prefault load, thermal state = 0%
B: Thermal state = 30%
C: Thermal state = 50%
D: Thermal state = 70%
E: Thermal state = 90%

P5005ENa

Figure 5: Thermal Overload curve

6-14 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 6 Protection Functions

2.7.1 Thermal Overload Protection Implementation


The device incorporates a current-based thermal characteristic, using fundamental load current to
model heating and cooling of the protected plant. The element can be set with both alarm and trip
stages.
Thermal Overload protection is implemented in the THERMAL OVERLOAD column of the relevant
settings group. The magnitudes of the three phase input currents are compared and the largest
magnitude is taken as the input to the thermal overload function.
Thermal over load function supports setting for alarm and trip stages. If the thermal overload function
is enabled and thermal state of the protected equipment exceeds the alarm threshold setting, the
alarm is issued and indicated by illuminated START LED on the relay front panel.
If the thermal overload function is enabled and thermal state of the protected equipment exceeds the
Trip threshold setting, a trip command is issued resulting in operation of output contacts .Trip condition
is indicated by illuminated TRIP LED.
The thermal state measurement is made available in the MEASUREMENTS menu.
The thermal state can be reset from the HMI panel by enabling the Thermal Reset setting to ‘Yes’
under RECORD CONTROL menu.

2.8 Broken Conductor


One type of unbalanced fault is the 'Series' or 'Open Circuit' fault. This type of fault can arise from,
among other things, broken conductors. Series faults do not cause an increase in phase current and
so cannot be detected by overcurrent IEDs. However, they do produce an imbalance, resulting in
negative phase sequence current, which can be detected.
It is possible to apply a negative phase sequence overcurrent element to detect broken conductors.
However, on a lightly loaded line, the negative sequence current resulting from a series fault condition
may be very close to, or less than, the full load steady state imbalance arising from CT errors and load
imbalances, making it very difficult to distinguish. A regular negative sequence element would
therefore not work at low load levels. To overcome this, the device incorporates a special Broken
Conductor protection element.
The Broken Conductor element measures the ratio of negative to positive phase sequence current
(I2/I1).
This ratio is approximately constant with variations in load current, therefore making it more sensitive
to series faults than standard negative sequence protection.

2.8.1 Broken Conductor Protection Implementation


Broken Conductor protection is implemented in the BROKEN CONDUCTOR column of the relevant
settings group.
This column contains the settings to enable the function, for the pickup threshold and the time delay.
Two stages are supported - BC Alarm & BC Trip. The BC Trip function is not part of General trip. Both
stages can be configured independently.

2.8.2 Broken Conductor Protection Logic


The ratio of I2/I1 is calculated and compared with the threshold. If the threshold is exceeded, the delay
timer is initiated.

Note: Broken conductor is activated only if current in any phase is more than 0.1 amp.

P154/EN M/C 6-15


6 Protection Functions P50 Agile P154

2.9 Undercurrent /Loss of Power Protection Function


The relay includes undercurrent elements that can be used to provide additional functions to prevent
damage to the power system. This function allows typical applications such as loss of load. The
undercurrent protection function is available only if the auxiliary contact of the CB status is connected
to the relay, for example, when CB (52A) contact of CB is high.

2.10 Circuit Breaker Fail Protection


When a fault occurs, one or more protection devices will operate and issue a trip command to the
relevant circuit breakers. Operation of the circuit breaker is essential to isolate the fault and prevent, or
at least limit, damage to the power system. For transmission and sub-transmission systems, slow fault
clearance can also threaten system stability.
For these reasons, it is common practise to install Circuit Breaker Failure protection (CBF). CBF
protection monitors the circuit breaker and establishes whether it has opened within a reasonable
time. If the fault current has not been interrupted following a set time delay from circuit breaker trip
initiation, the CBF protection will operate, whereby the upstream circuit breakers are back-tripped to
ensure that the fault is isolated.
CBF operation can also reset all start output contacts, ensuring that any blocks asserted on upstream
protection are removed.

2.10.1 Circuit Breaker Fail Implementation


Circuit Breaker Failure Protection is implemented in the CB FAIL column of the relevant settings
group.
The circuit breaker failure protection incorporates CB Fail Timer. For any protection trip, the CB Fail
Timer is started, and normally reset when the circuit breaker opens to isolate the fault. If breaker
opening is not detected, the CB Fail Timer times out and close an output contact assigned to breaker
fail (using the I/O assignment feature). This contact is used to back-trip upstream switchgear,
generally tripping all infeeds connected to the same busbar section.

6-16 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 6 Protection Functions

2.10.2 Circuit Breaker Fail Logic

CB Fail Enable

Any Trip
CBF Timer

1 S &
Ext CBF Initiated
Q
RD

If I in all Phase is
less than I<
&

If in1 is less than CBF Reset


In1<
&

Protection Reset

52(B) &

Figure 6: CB Fail Logic

CBF elements CB Fail Timer can be configured to operate for trips triggered by protection elements
within the device or via an external protection trip. The latter is achieved by allocating one of the opto-
isolated inputs to CBF Init signal using the I/O Mask feature.
It is possible to reset the CBF from a breaker open indication from a protection reset. In these cases
resetting is only allowed provided the undercurrent elements have also been reset. The resetting
options are summarised in the following table:
CBF function Reset options Description
CBF function will reset when the phase currents and earth current is less than
I<
set current
CBF function will reset when both conditions are satisfied:
CB Open + I< • CB is open (i.e. CB(52B) status is active)
• The phase currents and earth current is less than set current
CBF function will reset when both conditions are satisfied:
Prot Reset + I< • Protection is reset
• Phase currents and earth current is less than set current
CB Open CBF function will reset when CB is open (i.e. CB(52B) status is active)

The Remove I> Start and Remove IN> Start settings are used to remove starts issued from the
overcurrent and earth elements respectively following a breaker fail time out. The start is removed
when the cell is set to 'Enabled'.

P154/EN M/C 6-17


6 Protection Functions P50 Agile P154

2.11 Cold Load Pickup Function

When a feeder circuit breaker is closed in order to energise a load, the current levels that flow for a
period of time following energisation may be far greater than the normal load levels. Consequently,
overcurrent settings that have been applied to provide overcurrent protection may not be suitable
during this period of energisation (cold load), as they may initiate undesired tripping of the circuit
breaker. This scenario can be prevented with Cold Load Pickup (CLP) functionality.
The Cold Load Pickup (CLP) logic works by either:

• Inhibiting one or more stages of the overcurrent protection for a set duration
• Raising the overcurrent settings of selected stages, for the cold loading period.

The CLP logic therefore provides stability, whilst maintaining protection during the start-up.
Cold Load Pickup Protection is implemented in the COLD LOAD PICKUP column of the relevant
settings group.
This function acts upon the following protection functions:

• All overcurrent stages


• All Earth Fault stages

The principle of operation is identical for the 3-phase overcurrent protection and Earth Fault
overcurrent protection.
CLP operation occurs when the circuit breaker remains open for a time greater than tcold and is
subsequently closed. CLP operation is applied after tcold and remains for a set time delay of tclp
following closure of the circuit breaker. The status of the circuit breaker is provided by means of the
CB auxiliary contacts. Whilst CLP operation is in force, the CLP settings are enabled. After the time
delay tclp has elapsed, the normal overcurrent settings are applied and the CLP settings are disabled.
If desired, instead of applying different current setting thresholds for the cold load time, it is also
possible to completely block the overcurrent operation during this time, for any of the overcurrent
stages.

2.11.1 Cold Load Pickup Logic


The CLP logic is in operation when CLP is enabled AND CLP is initiated from a CB open condition
after the tcold period has elapsed. The CLP logic becomes inactive when CLP is disabled or when
there is a CB closed condition. tcold and tclp are initiated using the CB status signal produced by
connecting CB NO auxiliary contact from the circuit breaker. The CLP logic gets driven from a single
breaker contact.

2.11.2 Cold Load Pickup for SWITCH ONTO FAULT Condition


In some feeder applications, fast tripping may be required if a fault is already present on the feeder
when it is energized. Such faults may be due to a fault condition not having been removed from the
feeder, or due to earthing clamps having been left on following maintenance. In either case, it is
desirable to clear the fault condition quickly, rather than waiting for the time delay imposed by IDMT
overcurrent protection. The CLP logic can cater for this situation. Selected overcurrent/earth fault
stages could be set to instantaneous operation for a defined period following circuit breaker closure
(typically 200 ms). Therefore, instantaneous fault clearance would be achieved for a switch onto fault
(SOTF) condition

6-18 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 6 Protection Functions

2.12 Inrush Current Blocking Function (2ND Harm Blocking)


When a transformer is initially connected to a source of AC voltage, there may be a substantial surge
of current through the primary winding called inrush current. This is analogous to the inrush current
exhibited by an electric motor that is started up by sudden connection to a power source, although
transformer inrush is caused by a different phenomenon.
In an ideal transformer, the magnetizing current would rise to approximately twice its normal peak
value as well, generating the necessary MMF to create this higher-than-normal flux. However, most
transformers are not designed with enough of a margin between normal flux peaks and the saturation
limits to avoid saturating in a condition like this, and so the core will almost certainly saturate during
this first half-cycle of voltage. During saturation, disproportionate amounts of MMF are needed to
generate magnetic flux. This means that winding current, which creates the MMF to cause flux in the
core, could rise to a value way in excess of its steady state peak value. Furthermore, if the transformer
happens to have some residual magnetism in its core at the moment of connection to the source, the
problem could be further exacerbated.
We can see that inrush current is a regularly occurring phenomenon and should not be considered a
fault, as we do not wish the protection device to issue a trip command whenever a transformer or
machine is switched on. This presents a problem to the protection device, because it should always
trip on an internal fault. The problem is that typical internal transformer faults may produce
overcurrents which are not necessarily greater than the inrush current. Furthermore faults tend to
manifest themselves on switch on, due to the high inrush currents. For this reason, we need to find a
mechanism that can distinguish between fault current and inrush current. Fortunately this is possible
due to the different natures of the respective currents. An inrush current waveform is rich in harmonics,
whereas an internal fault current consists only of the fundamental. We can thus develop a restraining
method based on the harmonic content of the inrush current. The mechanism by which this is
achieved is called second harmonic blocking.

2.12.1 Second Harmonic Blocking Implementation


Second harmonic blocking can be applied to the following overcurrent protection types:

• Phase Overcurrent protection


• Earth Fault protection

Second harmonic blocking is implemented in the GROUP (n) SYSTEM CONFIG column, where (n) is
the number of the setting group.
Second harmonic blocking is applicable to all stages of each of the elements.
The function works by identifying and measuring the inrush currents present at switch on. It does this
by comparing the value of the second harmonic current components to the value of the fundamental
component. If this ratio exceeds the set thresholds, then the blocking signal is generated. The
threshold is defined by the 2ndHarm Thresh setting.
We only want the function to block the protection if the fundamental current component is within the
normal range. If this exceeds the normal range, then this is indicative of a fault, which must be
protected. For this reason there is another settable trigger I> lift 2H, which when exceeded, stops the
2nd harmonic blocking function.
Each overcurrent protection element has I>(n) 2H Blocking setting with which the type of blocking is
defined.

P154/EN M/C 6-19


6 Protection Functions P50 Agile P154

6-20 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 7 Protection Parameter Settings

PROTECTION PARAMETER
SETTINGS

CHAPTER 7

P15D/EN M/C 7-1


7 Protection Parameter Settings P50 Agile P154

7-2 P15D/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 7 Protection Parameter Settings

1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter consists of the following sections:

1 Chapter Overview
2 Protection Parameter Settings
2.1 System Data
2.2 CB CONTROL Settings
2.3 DATE AND TIME Settings
2.4 CONFIGURATION Settings
2.5 TRANS. RATIOS Settings
2.6 RECORD CONTROL Settings
2.7 COMMUNICATION Settings
2.8 IO CONFIGURATION Settings
2.9 O/P RELAY CONFIG Settings
2.10 DISTURBANCE RECORD Settings
2.11 COMMISSION TEST Settings
2.12 GROUP Settings
2.12.1 SYSTEM CONFIG SETTINGS
2.12.2 OVERCURRENT Settings
2.12.2.1 I>1 Function
2.12.2.2 I>2 Function
2.12.2.3 I>3 Function
2.12.3 EARTH FAULT 1 (Measured)
2.12.3.1 IN1>1 Function
2.12.3.2 IN1>1 Function- Sensitive Earth Fault (ordering option)
2.12.3.3 IN1>2 Function
2.12.3.4 IN1>2 Function- Sensitive Earth Fault (ordering option)
2.12.3.5 IN1>3 Function
2.12.3.6 IN1>3 Function- Sensitive Earth Fault (ordering option)
2.12.4 EARTH FAULT 2 (Derived)
2.12.4.1 IN2>1 Function
2.12.4.2 IN2>2 Function
2.12.4.3 IN2>3 Function
2.12.5 THERMAL OVERLOAD Settings
2.12.6 UNDERCURRENT Settings
2.12.7 COLD LOAD PICKUP Settings
2.12.8 NEG SEQUENCE O/C Settings
2.12.8.1 I2>1 Function
2.12.8.2 I2>2 Function
2.12.8.3 I2>3 Function
2.12.9 BROKEN CONDUCTOR Settings
2.12.10 CB FAIL Settings
2.12.11 VIEW RECORDS

P15D/EN M/C 7-3


7 Protection Parameter Settings P50 Agile P154

2 PROTECTION PARAMETER SETTINGS

2.1 System Data


Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges
Not editable*
1. Language English (*editable in relay models supporting multi-language
option )
2. Description P50 Agile P154 Not editable
3. Model Number P154xxxAxAxxxxA Not editable
4. Serial Number xxxP154xxxx Not editable
5. Software Version P154_x__x_0Vx.xx Not editable
6. Frequency 50Hz 50Hz / 60Hz
This cell sets the frequency to either 50 Hz or 60 Hz.
7. USB Address 1 Not editable
This cell displays the address for the front USB port of the relay.
8. USB Parity None Not editable
This cell displays the parity format used in the data frames.
9. USB Baud rate 57600 Not editable
This cell sets the communication speed between relay and configuration tool.
10. Password 0000 0000 to zzzz
This cell allows you to set new password. (Alphanumeric 4- characters)
11. Active Group Group 1 Not editable
This setting displays the active setting group (Group1 / Group2, whichever is selected).
12. Opto I/P Status Status of the Inputs Not editable
This setting displays the current status of Digital input
13. Relay O/P Status Status of the outputs Not editable
This setting displays the current status of Digital output
14. CB Open/Close No Operation No Operation / Open / Close
This setting supports open and close commands if enabled in the Circuit Breaker Control menu.
15. Opto I/P DC DC/AC
This setting allows selection of auxiliary voltage type AC/DC for opto inputs.
16. Config Port USB USB/RP
This setting allows selection of communication port for relay configuration using P50 Agile configurator.
(For DNP3.0, Config Port setting is fixed as ‘USB’)

2.2 CB CONTROL Settings


Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges
1. Password 0000 0000 to zzzz
This setting specifies to enter the set password
2. TCS Alarm No Yes / No
This setting is used to enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the Trip Circuit Supervision alarm function
3. TCS Timer 5.00 S 0.1s to 10s step 0.01s
This setting is used to set the time delay for the Trip Circuit supervision. If relay detects any discontinuity, then TCS alarm is generated
after the set time delay.

7-4 P15D/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 7 Protection Parameter Settings

Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges


4. CB Open S'vision Enabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting is used to enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the CB Open Supervision function
5. CB Open Time 0.30 S 0.05s to 1.0s steps 0.01s
This setting is used to define the circuit breaker opening time threshold.
6. CB Open Alarm Enabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting is used to enable (activate) or disable (turn off) the CB Open Alarm function.
7. CB Open Oper 2000 1 to 30000 step 1
This setting is used to define the threshold for number of CB open operations and an alarm is issued once this threshold is crossed.
8. CB Control By Disabled Disabled / Local/Remote / Local + Remote
This setting selects the type of circuit breaker control to be used.
9. Close Pulse Time 0.50 S 0.1s to 50s step 0.01s
This setting defines duration of the close pulse within which the CB should close after a close command is issued
10. Open Pulse Time 0.50 S 0.1s to 50s step 0.01s
This setting defines the duration of the trip pulse within which the CB should trip when a manual or protection trip command is issued

2.3 DATE AND TIME Settings


Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges
1. Password 0000 0000 to zzzz
This setting specifies to enter the set password.
2. Local Time Enable Fixed Fixed / Flexible / Disabled
Setting to turn on/off local time adjustments.
Fixed - A local time zone adjustment can be defined using the Local Time offset setting and all interfaces will use local time.
Flexible - A local time zone adjustment can be defined using the Local Time offset setting and each interface can be assigned to the UTC
zone or local time zone with the exception of the local interfaces which will always be in the local time zone.
Disabled - No local time zone will be maintained. Time synchronization from any interface will be used to directly set the master clock and
all displayed (or read) times on all interfaces will be based on the master clock with no adjustment.
3. Local Time Offset 0 Mins -720 to + 720 step 15 mins
Setting to specify an offset for local time zone from -12 to +12 hrs in 15 minute intervals. This adjustment is applied to the time based on
UTC/GMT master clock.
4. DST Enable Enabled Enabled / Disabled
Setting to turn on/off daylight saving time adjustment to local time.
5. DST Offset 60 Mins 30 mins, 60 mins
Setting to specify daylight saving offset used for the local time adjustment.
6. DST Start Last First / Second / Third / Fourth / Last
Setting to specify the week of the month in which daylight saving time adjustment starts
Sunday / Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday /
7. DST Start Day Sunday
Friday/ Saturday
Setting to specify the day of the week in which daylight saving time adjustment starts
January / February / March / April / May / June / July /
8. DST Start Month March
August / September / October / November / December
Setting to specify the month in which daylight saving time adjustment starts
9. DST Start Mins 60 Mins 0 to 1425 mins step 15mins.
Setting to specify the time of day in which daylight saving time adjustment starts. This is set relative to 00:00 hrs on the selected day
when time adjustment is to start
10. DST End Last First / Second / Third / Fourth / Last
Setting to specify the week of the month in which daylight saving time adjustment ends

P15D/EN M/C 7-5


7 Protection Parameter Settings P50 Agile P154

Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges


Sunday / Monday / Tuesday / Wednesday / Thursday /
11. DST End Day Sunday
Friday/ Saturday
Setting to specify the day of the week in which daylight saving time adjustment ends
January / February / March / April / May / June / July /
12. DST End Month October
August / September / October / November / December
Setting to specify the month in which daylight saving time adjustment ends
13. DST End Mins 60 Mins 0 to 1425 mins step 15mins.
Setting to specify the time of day in which daylight saving time adjustment ends. This is set relative to 00:00 hrs on the selected day when
time adjustment is to end
14. RP Time Zone Local UTC / Local
Setting for the rear port 1 interface to specify if time synchronization received will be local or universal time co-ordinated.
15. SET Hours 10 * 0 to 23 Hrs step 1
Hour setting needed when relay is not connected to SCADA system
16. SET Minutes 35 * 0 to 59 Mins step 1
Minutes setting needed when relay is not connected to SCADA system
17. SET Seconds 54 * 0 to 59 Sec. step 1
Seconds setting needed when relay is not connected to SCADA system
18. SET Date 28 * 1 to 31 Days step 1
Date setting needed when relay is not connected to SCADA system
19. SET Month 10 * 1 to 12 Months step 1
Month setting needed when relay is not connected to SCADA system
20. SET Year 14 * 0 to 99 Years step 1
Year setting needed when relay is not connected to SCADA system

Note:* The relay displays the current Date/Time set in the relay.

2.4 CONFIGURATION Settings


Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges
1. Password 0000 0000 to zzzz
This setting specifies to enter the set password
No Operation / All Settings / Setting Group 1 / Setting
2. Restore Defaults No Operation
Group 2
This setting restores the chosen setting groups to factory default values.
To restore the default values to any Group, set the ‘restore defaults’ cell to the relevant Group number. Alternatively it is possible to set
the ‘restore defaults’ cell to ‘all settings’ to restore the default values to all of the IED’s settings, not just the Group settings.
The default settings will be placed in Flash and will only be used by the IED after they have been confirmed by the user.

Note: Restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear communication port settings, which
may result in communication via the rear port being disrupted if the new (default)
settings do not match those of the master station

3. Active Settings Group 1 Group 1 / Group 2


This setting selects the active settings group.
4. Copy From Group 1 Group 1 / Group 2
This setting allows settings to be copied from a selected setting group.

7-6 P15D/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 7 Protection Parameter Settings

Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges


5. Copy To No Operation No Operation / Group 1 / Group 2
This command allows the displayed settings to be copied to a selected setting group.
6. Setting Group 1 Enabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting enables or disables settings Group 1. If the Setting Group 1 is enabled from the configuration setting, then all associated
settings and signals are available in Group 1 setting menu. If the Setting Group1 is disabled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
7. Setting Group 2 Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting enables or disables settings Group 2. If the Setting Group 2 is enabled from the configuration setting, then all associated
settings and signals are available in Group 2 setting menu. If the Setting Group 2 is disabled from the configuration, then all associated
settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
8. System Config Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting hides or unhides the System Config menu. Inside the 2nd Harmonic blocking related parameters are present
9. Overcurrent Enabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting enables (activate) or disables (turn off) the Phase Overcurrent Protection function. If disabled, then all associated settings and
signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting. Same for all other Items.
10. Neg Sequence O/C Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting enables (activate) or disables (turn off) the Negative Sequence Overcurrent Protection.
11. Broken Conductor Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting enables (activate) or disables (turn off) the Broken Conductor Protection.
12. Earth Fault 1 Enabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting enables (activate) or disables (turn off) the Measured Earth Fault Protection function
13 Earth Fault 2 Enabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting enables (activate) or disables (turn off) the Derived Earth Fault Protection function.
14. Thermal Overload Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting enables (activate) or disables (turn off) the Thermal Overload function.
15. Cold Load Pickup Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting enables (activate) or disables (turn off) the Cold Load Pickup function.
16. Measure’t Setup ABC ABC /RYB
This setting determines the representation of Phases. Based on this setting, the representation in measurements, records etc shall
change. No change is expected for the stored records, (if any)
17. UnderCurr Prot Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting enables (activate) or disables (turn off) the Under Current Protection.
18. CB Fail Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting enables (activate) or disables (turn off) the CB Fail Protection.
19. Setting Values Secondary Primary/Secondary
This setting determines the reference for all settings dependent on the transformer ratios; either referenced to the primary or the
secondary.

2.5 TRANS. RATIOS Settings


Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges
1. Password 0000 0000 to zzzz
This setting specifies to enter the set password
2. Phase CT Primary 100A 1 to 30000A step 1A
This setting determines the phase current transformer input primary current rating.
3. Phase CT Sec’y 1A 1A or 5 A
This setting determines the phase current transformer input secondary current rating.

P15D/EN M/C 7-7


7 Protection Parameter Settings P50 Agile P154

Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges


4. E/F CT Primary 100A 1 to 30000A step 1A
This setting determines the earth current transformer input primary current rating.
5. E/F CT Secondary 1A 1A or 5 A
This setting determines the earth current transformer input secondary current rating.

2.6 RECORD CONTROL Settings


Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges
1. Password 0000 0000 to zzzz
This setting specifies to enter the set password
2. Clear Events No Yes / No
Selecting “Yes” will erase the existing events stored in the relay.
3. Clear Faults No Yes / No
Selecting “Yes” will erase the existing fault records from the relay.
4. Clear Dist Recs No Yes / No
Selecting “Yes” will erase the existing disturbance records from the relay.
5. Clear Maint No Yes / No
Selecting “Yes” will erase the existing maintenance records from the relay.
6. Thermal Reset No Yes / No
Selecting “Yes” will reset the existing thermal state to zero.

2.7 COMMUNICATION Settings


Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges
1. Password 0000 0000 to zzzz
This setting specifies to enter the set password
2. RP1 Address 1 1 to 247 step 1
This setting sets the address of RP1.
3. RP1 Baud rate 57600 9600 / 19200 / 38400 / 57600
This cell sets the communication speed between relay and master station. It is important that both relay and master station are set at the
same speed setting.
4. RP1 Parity Even Even / Odd / None
This cell sets the parity format used in the data frames. It is important that both relay and master station are set with the same parity
setting.
5. RP1 Timesync Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting enables or disables time synchronization with master clock

2.8 IO CONFIGURATION Settings


Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges
1. Password 0000 0000 to zzzz
This setting specifies to enter the set password
Relay 654321 6 RL6……..1RL1
2.
Gen Strt* 000000 1 = assigned ; 0 = not assigned
This cell sets the output contact RL1 – RL6 for desired function.
LED G 8765 8 LED8……..5LED5
3.
Gen Strt* 0000 1 = assigned ; 0 = not assigned

7-8 P15D/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 7 Protection Parameter Settings

Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges


This cell sets the Green LED L5 – L8 for desired function.
LED R 8765 8 LED L8…..5LED L5
4.
Gen Strt* 0000 1 = assigned ; 0 = not assigned
This cell sets the RED LED L5 – L8 for desired function.
AND Logic DCBA D AND Logic D……..A AND Logic A
5.
Gen Strt* 0000 1 = assigned ; 0 = not assigned
This cell sets the input for AND Logic equation (A, B, C and D).
Opto I/P 654321 6 S6……..1S1
6.
Rem.Rst* 000000 1 = assigned ; 0 = not assigned
This cell sets the Opto I/P 1 – Opto I/P 6 for desired function.

* Note: The functions which can be assigned to Output Relay, LED Green, LED RED, AND Logic and Opto
I/P are listed in Chapter 8: Monitoring and Control.

2.9 O/P RELAY CONFIG Settings


Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges
1. Password 0000 0000 to zzzz
This setting specifies to enter the set password
2. Contact HR/SR 000000 1= HR / 0 = SR
This setting specifies the reset mechanism (manual / hand reset or self reset ) for O/P relay contacts.
3. O/P-1 Open Time 0.50 S 0s to 1s step 0.01s
4. O/P-2 Open Time 0.50 S 0s to 1s step 0.01s
5. O/P-3 Open Time 0.50 S 0s to 1s step 0.01s
6. O/P-4 Open Time 0.50 S 0s to 1s step 0.01s
7. O/P-5 Open Time 0.50 S 0s to 1s step 0.01s
8. O/P-6 Open Time 0.50 S 0s to 1s step 0.01s
This setting specifies the time duration for which the output contacts holds its state after non availability of the command to the O/P
contact.
9. LED G HR/SR 0000 1= HR / 0 = SR
This setting specifies the reset mechanism (manual/hand reset or self reset ) for Green LED.
10. LED R HR/SR 0000 1= HR / 0 = SR
This setting specifies the reset mechanism (manual/hand reset or self reset ) for RED LED.
11. ANDEQ A Op Time 1S 1s to 3600s step 1s
12. ANDEQ A Rst Time 1S 1s to 3600s step 1s
13. ANDEQ B Op Time 1S 1s to 3600s step 1s
14. ANDEQ B Rst Time 1S 1s to 3600s step 1s
15. ANDEQ C Op Time 1S 1s to 3600s step 1s
16. ANDEQ C Rst Time 1S 1s to 3600s step 1s
17. ANDEQ D Op Time 1S 1s to 3600s step 1s
18. ANDEQ D Rst Time 1S 1s to 3600s step 1s

P15D/EN M/C 7-9


7 Protection Parameter Settings P50 Agile P154

Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges


These settings specifies the operating / reset time delay allocated to the logic AND equation.

Note: In the P50 Agile Configurator, the above settings parameters from serial no 9 to 18
are available under “IO Mask”.

2.10 DISTURBANCE RECORD Settings


Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges
1. Password 0000 0000 to zzzz
This setting specifies to enter the set password
2. Trigger Position 50% 10% to 90% step 1%
This setting sets the trigger point as a percentage of the duration. For example, the default setting, which is set to 50% (of 1.0s) gives 0.5s
prefault and 0.5s post fault recording times.

2.11 COMMISSION TEST Settings


Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges
1. Password 0000 0000 to zzzz
This setting specifies to enter the set password
2. Test Mode Disabled Disabled, Test Mode, Contacts Blocked
This setting allows secondary injection testing to be performed on the relay itself.
3. Test Pattern 000000 0 = not operated , 1 = operated
This setting is used to select the output relay contacts that will be tested when the Contact Test cell is set to Apply Test.
4. Contact Test No Operation No Operation, Apply Test, Remove Test
This setting is used to test the relay output contact operation.
5. Test LEDs No Operation No Operation / Apply Test
This setting is used to test the 4 no’s programmable LED’s.

2.12 GROUP Settings


The following settings are common to GROUP 1 and 2.

2.12.1 SYSTEM CONFIG SETTINGS


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
1. 2nd Harmonic Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting is used to enable or disable the 2nd Harmonic blocking of the overcurrent protection.
2. 2ndHarm Thresh 20% 5% to 70% step 1%
This setting is used to specify the 2nd Harm Threshold value. If the level of 2nd harmonic/fundamental in any phase current or neutral
current exceeds the setting, the overcurrent protection will be blocked as selected.
3. I>lift 2H 10.00*In 4 to 32*In step 0.01*In

7-10 P15D/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 7 Protection Parameter Settings

Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range


The 2nd harmonic blocking is applied only when the fundamental current is above 2nd Harm Thresh and below I> lift setting. The reset
levels are 95% of these thresholds.

2.12.2 OVERCURRENT Settings

2.12.2.1 I>1 Function


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse / S Inverse
1.3Sec / IEC V Inverse / IEC E Inverse / UK
1. I>1 Function IEC S Inverse LT Inverse / IEEE M Inverse / IEEE V Inverse
/ IEEE E Inverse / US Inverse / US ST
Inverse
This setting determines the tripping characteristic for the first stage overcurrent element.
If DT 0.05 to 35.00*In step 0.01*In
2. I>1 Current Set 1.00*In
If IDMT 0.05 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the pick-up setting for first stage overcurrent element.
3. I>1 Time Delay 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for first stage overcurrent element.
4. I>1 TMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic.
5. I>1 Time Dial 1.00 0.01 to 100 step 0.01s
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US IDMT curves.
6. I>1 Reset Char DT DT/IDMT
This setting determines the type of reset/release characteristics. IDMT applicable for IEEE curves only.
7. I>1 RTMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the reset/release time for IEEE IDMT characteristic
8. I>1 tRESET 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the reset/release time for Definite Time (DT) and all IDMT curve
9. I>1 2H Blocking Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting determines the enabling/disabling of blocking first stage overcurrent element due to presence of inrush current.
If I>1 Blocking and 2nd Harmonic both setting are enabled, then (I>1) trip command will be blocked in case 2nd harmonics content in any
phase is above the 2ndHarm Thresh. and fundamental current is below I> lift 2H setting . (Set in SYSTEM CONFIG Menu.)

2.12.2.2 I>2 Function


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse / S Inverse
1.3Sec / IEC V Inverse / IEC E Inverse / UK
1. I>2 Function IEC S Inverse LT Inverse / IEEE M Inverse / IEEE V Inverse
/ IEEE E Inverse / US Inverse / US ST
Inverse
This setting determines the tripping characteristic for the second stage overcurrent element.
If DT 0.05 to 35.00*In step 0.01*In
2. I>2 Current Set 1.00*In
If IDMT 0.05 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the pick-up setting for second stage overcurrent element.
3. I>2 Time Delay 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for second stage overcurrent element.
4. I>2 TMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005

P15D/EN M/C 7-11


7 Protection Parameter Settings P50 Agile P154

Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range


This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic.
5. I>2 Time Dial 1.00 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US IDMT curves.
6. I>2 Reset Char DT DT/IDMT
This setting determines the type of reset/release characteristics. IDMT applicable for IEEE curves only.
7. I>2 RTMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the reset/release time for IEEE IDMT characteristic
8. I>2 tRESET 01.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the reset/release time for Definite Time (DT) and all IDMT curve
9. I>2 2H Blocking Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting determines the enabling/disabling of blocking second stage overcurrent element due to presence of inrush current.
If I>2 Blocking and 2nd Harmonic both setting are enabled, then (I>2) trip command will be blocked in case 2nd harmonics content in any
phase is above the 2ndHarm Thresh. and fundamental current is below I> lift 2H setting . (Set in SYSTEM CONFIG Menu.)

2.12.2.3 I>3 Function


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse / S Inverse
1.3Sec / IEC V Inverse / IEC E Inverse / UK
1. I>3 Function IEC S Inverse LT Inverse / IEEE M Inverse / IEEE V Inverse
/ IEEE E Inverse / US Inverse / US ST
Inverse
This setting determines the tripping characteristic for the third stage overcurrent element.
If DT 1.0 to 35.00*In step 0.01*In
2. I>3 Current Set 1.00*In
If IDMT 0.05 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the pick-up setting for second third overcurrent element.
3. I>3 Time Delay 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for third stage overcurrent element.
4. I>3 TMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic.
5. I>3 Time Dial 1.00 0.01 to 100 step 0.01s
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US IDMT curves.
6. I>3 Reset Char DT DT/IDMT
This setting determines the type of reset/release characteristics. IDMT applicable for IEEE curves only.
7. I>3 RTMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the reset/release time for IEEE IDMT characteristic
8. I>3 tRESET 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the reset/release time for Definite Time (DT) and all IDMT curve
9. I>3 2H Blocking Disabled Enabled / Disabled

7-12 P15D/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 7 Protection Parameter Settings

Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range


This setting determines the enabling/disabling of blocking third stage overcurrent element due to presence of inrush current.
If I>3 Blocking and 2nd Harmonic both setting are enabled, then (I>3) trip command will be blocked in case 2nd harmonics content in any
phase is above the 2ndHarm Thresh. and fundamental current is below I> lift 2H setting . (Set in SYSTEM CONFIG Menu.)

2.12.3 EARTH FAULT 1 (Measured)

2.12.3.1 IN1>1 Function


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse / S Inverse
1.3Sec / IEC V Inverse / IEC E Inverse / UK
1. IN1>1 Function IEC S Inverse LT Inverse / IEEE M Inverse / IEEE V Inverse
/ IEEE E Inverse / US Inverse / US ST
Inverse
This setting determines the tripping characteristic for the first stage measured earth fault element.
If DT 0.05 to 35.00*In step 0.01*In
2. IN1>1 Current Set 1.00*In
If IDMT 0.05 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the pick-up setting for first stage measured earth fault element.
3. IN1>1 Time Delay 1.00 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for first stage of measured earth fault element.
4. IN1>1 TMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic.
5. IN1>1 Time Dial 1.00 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US IDMT curves.
6. IN1>1 Reset Char DT DT/IDMT
This setting determines the type of reset/release characteristics. IDMT applicable for IEEE curves only.
7. IN1>1 RTMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the reset/release time for IEEE IDMT characteristic
8. IN1>1 tRESET 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the reset/release time for Definite Time (DT) and all IDMT curve
9. IN1>1 2H Blocking Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting determines the enabling/disabling of blocking first stage measured earth fault element due to presence of inrush current.
If IN1>1 Blocking and 2nd Harmonic both setting are enabled, then (IN1>1) trip command will be blocked in case 2nd harmonics content
in any phase is above the 2ndHarm Thresh. and fundamental current is below I> lift 2H setting . (Set in SYSTEM CONFIG Menu.)

2.12.3.2 IN1>1 Function- Sensitive Earth Fault (ordering option)


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse / S Inverse
1.3Sec / IEC V Inverse / IEC E Inverse / UK
1. IN1>1 Function IEC S Inverse LT Inverse / IEEE M Inverse / IEEE V Inverse
/ IEEE E Inverse / US Inverse / US ST
Inverse
This setting determines the tripping characteristic for the first stage measured earth fault element.
If DT 0.002 to 2.00*In step 0.001*In
2. IN1>1 Current Set 0.200*In
If IDMT 0.002 to 0.200*In step 0.001*In
This setting determines the pick-up setting for first stage measured earth fault element.
3. IN1>1 Time Delay 1.00 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for first stage of measured earth fault element.

P15D/EN M/C 7-13


7 Protection Parameter Settings P50 Agile P154

Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range


4. IN1>1 TMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic.
5. IN1>1 Time Dial 1.00 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US IDMT curves.
6. IN1>1 Reset Char DT DT/IDMT
This setting determines the type of reset/release characteristics. IDMT applicable for IEEE curves only.
7. IN1>1 RTMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the reset/release time for IEEE IDMT characteristic
8. IN1>1 tRESET 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the reset/release time for Definite Time (DT) and all IDMT curve
9. IN1>1 2H Blocking Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting determines the enabling/disabling of blocking first stage measured earth fault element due to presence of inrush current.
If IN1>1 Blocking and 2nd Harmonic both setting are enabled, then (IN1>1) trip command will be blocked in case 2nd harmonics content
in any phase is above the 2ndHarm Thresh. and fundamental current is below I> lift 2H setting . (Set in SYSTEM CONFIG Menu.)

2.12.3.3 IN1>2 Function


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse / S Inverse
1.3Sec / IEC V Inverse / IEC E Inverse / UK
1. IN1>2 Function IEC S Inverse LT Inverse / IEEE M Inverse / IEEE V Inverse
/ IEEE E Inverse / US Inverse / US ST
Inverse
This setting determines the tripping characteristic for the second stage measured earth fault element.
If DT 0.05 to 35.00*In step 0.01*In
2. IN1>2 Current Set 1.00*In
If IDMT then 0.05 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the pick-up setting for second stage measured earth fault element.
3. IN1>2 Time Delay 1.00 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for second stage of measured earth fault element.
4. IN1>2 TMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic.
5. IN1>2 Time Dial 1.00 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US IDMT curves.
6. IN1>2 Reset Char DT DT/IDMT
This setting determines the type of reset/release characteristics. IDMT applicable for IEEE curves only.
7. IN1>2 RTMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the reset/release time for IEEE IDMT characteristic
8. IN1>2 tRESET 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the reset/release time for Definite Time (DT) and all IDMT curve
9. IN1>2 2H Blocking Disabled Enabled / Disabled

7-14 P15D/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 7 Protection Parameter Settings

Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range


This setting determines the enabling/disabling of blocking second stage measured earth fault element due to presence of inrush current.
If IN1>2 Blocking and 2nd Harmonic both setting are enabled, then (IN1>2) trip command will be blocked in case 2nd harmonics content
in any phase is above the 2ndHarm Thresh. and fundamental current is below I> lift 2H setting . (Set in SYSTEM CONFIG Menu.)

2.12.3.4 IN1>2 Function- Sensitive Earth Fault (ordering option)


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse / S Inverse
1.3Sec / IEC V Inverse / IEC E Inverse / UK
1. IN1>2 Function IEC S Inverse LT Inverse / IEEE M Inverse / IEEE V Inverse
/ IEEE E Inverse / US Inverse / US ST
Inverse
This setting determines the tripping characteristic for the second stage measured earth fault element.
If DT 0.002 to 2.00*In step 0.001*In
2. IN1>2 Current Set 0.200*In
If IDMT 0.002 to 0.200*In step 0.001*In
This setting determines the pick-up setting for second stage measured earth fault element.
3. IN1>2 Time Delay 1.00 s 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for second stage of measured earth fault element.
4. IN1>2 TMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic.
5. IN1>2 Time Dial 01.00 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US IDMT curves.
6. IN1>2 Reset Char DT DT/IDMT
This setting determines the type of reset/release characteristics. IDMT applicable for IEEE curves only.
7. IN1>2 RTMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the reset/release time for IEEE IDMT characteristic
8. IN1>2 tRESET 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the reset/release time for Definite Time (DT) and all IDMT curve
9. IN1>2 2H Blocking Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting determines the enabling/disabling of blocking second stage measured earth fault element due to presence of inrush current.
If IN1>2 Blocking and 2nd Harmonic both setting are enabled, then (IN1>2) trip command will be blocked in case 2nd harmonics content
in any phase is above the 2ndHarm Thresh. and fundamental current is below I> lift 2H setting . (Set in SYSTEM CONFIG Menu.)

2.12.3.5 IN1>3 Function


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse / S Inverse
1.3Sec / IEC V Inverse / IEC E Inverse / UK
1. IN1>3 Function IEC S Inverse LT Inverse / IEEE M Inverse / IEEE V Inverse
/ IEEE E Inverse / US Inverse / US ST
Inverse
This setting determines the tripping characteristic for the third stage measured earth fault element.
If DT 1.0 to 35.00*In step 0.01*In
2. IN1>3 Current Set 01.00*In
If IDMT 0.05 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the pick-up setting for third stage measured earth fault element.
3. IN1>3 Time Delay 1.00 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for third stage of measured earth fault element.
4. IN1>3 TMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic.

P15D/EN M/C 7-15


7 Protection Parameter Settings P50 Agile P154

Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range


5. IN1>3 Time Dial 1.00 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US IDMT curves.
6. IN1>3 Reset Char DT DT/IDMT
This setting determines the type of reset/release characteristics. IDMT applicable for IEEE curves only.
7. IN1>3 RTMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the reset/release time for IEEE IDMT characteristic
8. IN1>3 tRESET 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the reset/release time for Definite Time (DT) and all IDMT curve
9. IN1>3 2H Blocking Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting determines the enabling/disabling of blocking third stage measured earth fault element due to presence of inrush current.
If IN1>3 Blocking and 2nd Harmonic both setting are enabled, then (IN1>3) trip command will be blocked in case 2nd harmonics content
in any phase is above the 2ndHarm Thresh. and fundamental current is below I> lift 2H setting . (Set in SYSTEM CONFIG Menu.)

2.12.3.6 IN1>3 Function- Sensitive Earth Fault (ordering option)


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse / S Inverse
1.3Sec / IEC V Inverse / IEC E Inverse / UK
1. IN1>2 Function IEC S Inverse LT Inverse / IEEE M Inverse / IEEE V Inverse
/ IEEE E Inverse / US Inverse / US ST
Inverse
This setting determines the tripping characteristic for the third stage measured earth fault element.
0.200*In If DT 0.002 to 2.000*In step 0.001*In
2. IN1>3 Current Set
If IDMT 0.002 to 0.200*In step 0.001*In
This setting determines the pick-up setting for third stage measured earth fault element.
3. IN1>3 Time Delay 1.00 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for third stage of measured earth fault element.
4. IN1>3 TMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic.
5. IN1>3 Time Dial 1.00 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US IDMT curves.
6. IN1>3 Reset Char DT DT/IDMT
This setting determines the type of reset/release characteristics. IDMT applicable for IEEE curves only.
7. IN1>3 RTMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the reset/release time for IEEE IDMT characteristic
8. IN1>3 tRESET 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the reset/release time for Definite Time (DT) and all IDMT curve
9. IN1>3 2H Blocking Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting determines the enabling/disabling of blocking third stage measured earth fault element due to presence of inrush current.
If IN1>3 Blocking and 2nd Harmonic both setting are enabled, then (IN1>3) trip command will be blocked in case 2nd harmonics content
in any phase is above the 2ndHarm Thresh. and fundamental current is below I> lift 2H setting . (Set in SYSTEM CONFIG Menu.)

7-16 P15D/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 7 Protection Parameter Settings

2.12.4 EARTH FAULT 2 (Derived)

2.12.4.1 IN2>1 Function


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse / S Inverse
1.3Sec / IEC V Inverse / IEC E Inverse / UK
1. IN2>1 Function IEC S Inverse LT Inverse / IEEE M Inverse / IEEE V Inverse
/ IEEE E Inverse / US Inverse / US ST
Inverse
This setting determines the tripping characteristic for the first stage derived earth fault element.
If DT 0.10 to 35.00*In step 0.01*In
2. IN2>1 Current Set 1.00*In
If IDMT 0.10 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the pick-up setting for first stage derived earth fault element.
3. IN2>1 Time Delay 1.00 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for first stage of derived earth fault element.
4. IN2>1 TMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic.
5. IN2>1 Time Dial 1.00 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US IDMT curves.
6. IN2>1 Reset Char DT DT/IDMT
This setting determines the type of reset/release characteristics. IDMT applicable for IEEE curves only.
7. IN2>1 RTMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the reset/release time for IEEE IDMT characteristic
8. IN2>1 tRESET 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the reset/release time for Definite Time (DT) and all IDMT curve
9. IN2>1 2H Blocking Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting determines the enabling/disabling of blocking first stage derived earth fault element due to presence of inrush current.
If IN2>1 Blocking and 2nd Harmonic both setting are enabled, then (IN2>1) trip command will be blocked in case 2nd harmonics content
in any phase is above the 2ndHarm Thresh. and fundamental current is below I> lift 2H setting . (Set in SYSTEM CONFIG Menu.)

2.12.4.2 IN2>2 Function


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse / S Inverse
1.3Sec / IEC V Inverse / IEC E Inverse / UK
1. IN2>2 Function IEC S Inverse LT Inverse / IEEE M Inverse / IEEE V Inverse
/ IEEE E Inverse / US Inverse / US ST
Inverse
This setting determines the tripping characteristic for the second stage derived earth fault element.
If DT 0.10 to 35.00*In step 0.01*In
2. IN2>2 Current Set 1.00*In
If IDMT 0.10 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the pick-up setting for second stage derived earth fault element.
3. IN2>2 Time Delay 1.00 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for second stage of derived earth fault element.
4. IN2>2 TMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic.
5. IN2>2 Time Dial 01.00 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US IDMT curves.
6. IN2>2 Reset Char DT DT/IDMT

P15D/EN M/C 7-17


7 Protection Parameter Settings P50 Agile P154

Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range


This setting determines the type of reset/release characteristics. IDMT applicable for IEEE curves only.
7. IN2>2 RTMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the reset/release time for IEEE IDMT characteristic
8. IN2>2 tRESET 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the reset/release time for Definite Time (DT) and all IDMT curve
9. IN2>2 2H Blocking Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting determines the enabling/disabling of blocking second stage derived earth fault element due to presence of inrush current.
If IN2>2 Blocking and 2nd Harmonic both setting are enabled, then (IN2>2) trip command will be blocked in case 2nd harmonics content
in any phase is above the 2ndHarm Thresh. and fundamental current is below I> lift 2H setting . (Set in SYSTEM CONFIG Menu.)

2.12.4.3 IN2>3 Function


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse / S Inverse
1.3Sec / IEC V Inverse / IEC E Inverse / UK
1. IN2>3 Function IEC S Inverse LT Inverse / IEEE M Inverse / IEEE V Inverse
/ IEEE E Inverse / US Inverse / US ST
Inverse
This setting determines the tripping characteristic for the third stage derived earth fault element.
If DT 1.0 to 35.00*In step 0.01*In
2. IN2>3 Current Set 1.00*In
If IDMT 0.10 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the pick-up setting for third stage derived earth fault element.
3. IN2>3 Time Delay 1.00 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for third stage of derived earth fault element.
4. IN2>3 TMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic.
5. IN2>3 Time Dial 1.00 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US IDMT curves.
6. IN2>3 Reset Char DT DT/IDMT
This setting determines the type of reset/release characteristics. IDMT applicable for IEEE curves only.
7. IN2>3 RTMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the reset/release time for IEEE IDMT characteristic
8. IN2>3 tRESET 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the reset/release time for Definite Time (DT) and all IDMT curve
9. IN2>3 2H Blocking Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting determines the enabling/disabling of blocking third stage derived earth fault element due to presence of inrush current.
If IN2>3 Blocking and 2nd Harmonic both setting are enabled, then (IN2>3) trip command will be blocked in case 2nd harmonics content
in any phase is above the 2ndHarm Thresh. and fundamental current is below I> lift 2H setting . (Set in SYSTEM CONFIG Menu.)

2.12.5 THERMAL OVERLOAD Settings


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
1. Characteristic Single Disabled/ Single
This setting determines the operating characteristic of the thermal overload element.
2. Thermal Trip 1.00*In 0.05 to 4.00* In step 0.01 In
This setting sets the pick-up threshold of the thermal characteristic. This would normally be the maximum full load current.
3. Thermal Alarm 70% 50 to 100% step 1%
This setting sets the thermal state threshold at which an alarm will be generated. This corresponds to a percentage of the trip threshold.

7-18 P15D/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 7 Protection Parameter Settings

Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range


4. Time constant 1 10 1 to 200min step 1min
This setting determines the thermal time constant for a single time constant characteristic.
5. K 1.05 1 to 1.5 step 0.01
This setting specify the k constant of thermal over load function

2.12.6 UNDERCURRENT Settings


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
1. I< Status Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting is used to enable or disable the Undercurrent protection.
2. I< 1.00*In 0.10In to 1.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines pick-up setting for undercurrent element.
3. tI< 1.00 S 0.20s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the time-delay for tripping.

2.12.7 COLD LOAD PICKUP Settings


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
1. tcold Time Delay 7200 S 0 to 14400s step 1s
This setting determines the time the load needs to be de-energized (dead time) before the new settings are applied.
2. tclp Time Delay 7200 S 0 to 14400s step 1s
This setting controls the period of time for which the relevant overcurrent and earth fault settings are altered or inhibited following circuit
breaker closure.
3. I>1 Status Enabled Blocked / Enabled
The I>1 status cells have two setting options, "Enabled" and "Blocked". Selecting "Enabled" for a particular stage means that the current
and time settings programmed in the following cells will be adopted during the "tclp" time. Selecting "Blocked" simply blocks the relevant
protection stage during the "tclp" time. It also removes the following current and time settings for that stage from the menu.
4. I>1 Current Set 1.50*In 0.05 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the new pick-up setting for first stage overcurrent element during the tclp time delay.
5. I>1 Time Delay 0.01 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the new operating time delay for the first stage definite time overcurrent element during the tclp time.
6. I>1 TMS 0.100 0.025 to 1.2 in step 0.005
This setting determines the new time multiplier setting for the first stage element to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT
characteristic during the tclp time.
7. I>1 Time Dial 0.01 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This setting determines the new time dial setting for the first stage overcurrent element to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US IDMT
characteristic during the tclp time.
8. I>2 Status Enabled Block / Enabled
The I>2 status cells have two setting options, "Enabled" and "Blocked". Selecting "Enabled" for a particular stage means that the current
and time settings programmed in the following cells will be adopted during the "tclp" time. Selecting "Blocked" simply blocks the relevant
protection stage during the "tclp" time. It also removes the following current and time settings for that stage from the menu.
9. I>2 Current Set 1.50*In 0.05 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the new pick-up setting for second stage overcurrent element during the tclp time delay.
10. I>2 Time Delay 0.01 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the new operating time delay for the second stage definite time overcurrent element during the tclp time.
11. I>2 TMS 0.100 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the new time multiplier setting for the second stage element to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT
characteristic during the tclp time.
12. I>2 Time Dial 0.01 0.01 to 100 step 0.01

P15D/EN M/C 7-19


7 Protection Parameter Settings P50 Agile P154

Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range


This setting determines the new time dial setting for the second stage overcurrent element to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US
IDMT characteristic during the tclp time
13. I>3 Status Enabled Blocked / Enabled
The I>3 status cells have two setting options, "Enabled" and "Blocked". Selecting "Enabled" for a particular stage means that the current
and time settings programmed in the following cells will be adopted during the "tclp" time. Selecting "Block" simply blocks the relevant
protection stage during the "tclp" time. It also removes the following current and time settings for that stage from the menu
14. I>3 Current Set 1.50*In 0.05 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the new pick-up setting for third stage overcurrent element during the tclp time delay.
15. I>3 Time Delay 0.01 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the new operating time delay for the third stage definite time overcurrent element during the tclp time.
16. I>3 TMS 0.100 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the new time multiplier setting for the third stage element to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT
characteristic during the tclp time.
17. I>3 Time Dial 0.01 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This setting determines the new time dial setting for the third stage overcurrent element to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US
IDMT characteristic during the tclp time
18. IN1>1 Status Enabled Blocked / Enabled
The IN1>1 status cells have two setting options, "Enabled" and "Blocked". Selecting "Enabled" for a particular stage means that the
current and time settings programmed in the following cells will be adopted during the "tclp" time. Selecting "Blocked" simply blocks the
relevant protection stage during the "tclp" time. It also removes the following current and time settings for that stage from the menu.
0.05 to 4.00 step 0.01*In
19. IN1>1 Current Set 0.20*In
0.002 to 0.2*In step 0.001*In (for SEF)
This setting determines the new pick-up setting for first stage earth fault element during the tclp time delay.
20. IN1>1 Time Delay 0.01 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the new operating time delay for the first stage definite time element during the tclp time.
21. IN1>1 TMS 0.100 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the new time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic during the tclp time.
22. IN1>1 Time Dial 0.01 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This setting determines the new time multiplier setting for the first stage measured earth fault element to adjust the operating time of the
IEEE / US IDMT characteristic during the tclp time.
23. IN1>2 Status Enabled Blocked / Enabled
The IN1>2 status cells have two setting options, "Enabled" and "Blocked". Selecting "Enabled" for a particular stage means that the
current and time settings programmed in the following cells will be adopted during the "tclp" time. Selecting of "Blocked" simply blocks the
relevant protection stage during the "tclp" time. It also removes the following current and time settings for that stage from the menu.
0.20*In 0.05 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
24. IN1>2 Current Set
0.002 to 0.2*In step of 0.001*In (for SEF)
This setting determines the new pick-up setting for second stage earth fault element during the tclp time delay.
25. IN1>2 Time Delay 0.01 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the new operating time delay for the second stage definite time element during the tclp time.
26. IN1>2 TMS 0.100 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the new time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic during the tclp time.
27. IN1>2 Time Dial 0.01 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This setting determines the new time multiplier setting for the second stage measured earth fault element to adjust the operating time of
the IEEE / US IDMT characteristic during the tclp time.
28. IN1>3 Status Enabled Blocked / Enabled
The IN1>3 status cells have two setting options, "Enabled" and "Blocked". Selecting "Enabled" for a particular stage means that the
current and time settings programmed in the following cells will be adopted during the "tclp" time. Selecting "Blocked" simply blocks the
relevant protection stage during the "tclp" time. It also removes the following current and time settings for that stage from the menu.

7-20 P15D/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 7 Protection Parameter Settings

Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range


0.20*In 0.05 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
29. IN1>3 Current Set
0.002 to 0.2*In step 0.001*In (for SEF)
This setting determines the new pick-up setting for third stage earth fault element during the tclp time delay.
30. IN1>3 Time Delay 0.01 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the new operating time delay for the third stage definite time element during the tclp time.
31. IN1>3 TMS 0.100 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the new time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic during the tclp time.
32. IN1>3 Time Dial 0.01 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This setting determines the new time multiplier setting for the third stage measured earth fault element to adjust the operating time of the
IEEE / US IDMT characteristic during the tclp time.
33. IN2>1 Status Enabled Blocked / Enabled
The IN2>1 status cells have two setting options, "Enabled" and "Blocked". Selecting "Enabled" for a particular stage means that the
current and time settings programmed in the following cells will be adopted during the "tclp" time. Selecting "Blocked" simply blocks the
relevant protection stage during the "tclp" time. It also removes the following current and time settings for that stage from the menu.
34. IN2>1 Current Set 00.20*In 0.10 to 4.00 step 0.01*In
This setting determines the new pick-up setting for first stage earth fault element during the tclp time delay.
35. IN2>1 Time Delay 0.01 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the new operating time delay for the first stage definite time element during the tclp time.
36. IN2>1 TMS 0.100 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the new time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic during the tclp time.
37. IN2>1 Time Dial 0.01 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This setting determines the new time multiplier setting for the first stage derived earth fault element to adjust the operating time of the
IEEE / US IDMT characteristic during the tclp time.
38. IN2>2 Status Enabled Blocked / Enabled
The IN2>2 status cells have two setting options, "Enabled" and "Blocked". Selecting "Enabled" for a particular stage means that the
current and time settings programmed in the following cells will be adopted during the "tclp" time. Selecting of "Blocked" simply blocks the
relevant protection stage during the "tclp" time. It also removes the following current and time settings for that stage from the menu.
39. IN2>2 Current Set 0.20*In 0.10 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the new pick-up setting for second stage earth fault element during the tclp time delay.
39. IN2>2 Current Set 0.20*In 0.10 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the new pick-up setting for second stage earth fault element during the tclp time delay.
40. IN2>2 Time Delay 0.01 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the new operating time delay for the second stage definite time element during the tclp time.
41. IN2>2 TMS 0.1 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the new time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic during the tclp time.
42. IN2>2 Time Dial 0.01 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This setting determines the new time multiplier setting for the second stage derived earth fault element to adjust the operating time of the
IEEE / US IDMT characteristic during the tclp time.
43. IN2>3 Status Enabled Blocked / Enabled
The IN2>3 status cells have two setting options, "Enabled" and "Blocked". Selecting "Enabled" for a particular stage means that the
current and time settings programmed in the following cells will be adopted during the "tclp" time. Selecting "Blocked" simply blocks the
relevant protection stage during the "tclp" time. It also removes the following current and time settings for that stage from the menu.
44. IN2>3 Current Set 0.20*In 0.10 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the new pick-up setting for third stage earth fault element during the tclp time delay.
45. IN2>3 Time Delay 0.01 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the new operating time delay for the third stage definite time element during the tclp time.
46. IN2>3 TMS 0.100 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005

P15D/EN M/C 7-21


7 Protection Parameter Settings P50 Agile P154

Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range


This setting determines the new time multiplier setting to adjust the operating time of the IEC IDMT characteristic during the tclp time.
47. IN2>3 Time Dial 0.01 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This setting determines the new time multiplier setting for the third stage derived earth fault element to adjust the operating time of the
IEEE / US IDMT characteristic during the tclp time.

2.12.8 NEG SEQUENCE O/C Settings

2.12.8.1 I2>1 Function


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse / S Inverse
1.3Sec / IEC V Inverse / IEC E Inverse / UK
1. I2>1 Function IEC S Inverse LT Inverse / IEEE M Inverse / IEEE V Inverse
/ IEEE E Inverse / US Inverse / US ST
Inverse
This setting determines the tripping characteristic for the first stage Negative sequence overcurrent element.
If DT 0.10 to 35.00*In step 0.01*In
2. I2>1 Current Set 1.00*In
If IDMT 0.10 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the pick-up setting for first stage Negative sequence overcurrent element.
3. I2>1 Time Delay 1.00 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for first stage Negative sequence overcurrent element.
4. I2>1 TMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic.
5. I2>1 Time Dial 1.00 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US IDMT curves.
6. I2>2 Reset Char DT DT/IDMT
This setting determines the type of reset/release characteristics.
7. I2>1 RTMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the reset/release time for IEEE IDMT characteristic. IDMT applicable for IEEE curves only.
8. I2>1 tRESET 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the reset/release time for Definite Time (DT) and all IDMT curve
9. I2>1 2H Blocking Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting determines the enabling/disabling of blocking first stage Negative sequence overcurrent element due to presence of inrush
current.
If I2>1 Blocking and 2nd Harmonic both setting are enabled, then (I2>1) trip command will be blocked in case 2nd harmonics content in
any phase is above the 2ndHarm Thresh. and fundamental current is below I> lift 2H setting . (Set in SYSTEM CONFIG Menu.)

2.12.8.2 I2>2 Function


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse / S Inverse
1.3Sec / IEC V Inverse / IEC E Inverse / UK
1. I2>2 Function IEC S Inverse LT Inverse / IEEE M Inverse / IEEE V Inverse
/ IEEE E Inverse / US Inverse / US ST
Inverse
This setting determines the tripping characteristic for the second stage Negative sequence overcurrent element.
If DT 0.10 to 35.00*In step 0.01*In
2. I2>2 Current Set 1.00*In
If IDMT 0.10 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the pick-up setting for second stage Negative sequence overcurrent element.
3. I2>2 Time Delay 1.00 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s

7-22 P15D/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 7 Protection Parameter Settings

Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range


This setting determines the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for second stage Negative sequence overcurrent element.
4. I2>2 TMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic.
5. I2>2 Time Dial 1.00 0.01 to 100 step 0.01
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US IDMT curves.
6. I2>3 Reset Char DT DT/IDMT
This setting determines the type of reset/release characteristics. IDMT applicable for IEEE curves only.
7. I2>2 RTMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the reset/release time for IEEE IDMT characteristic
8. I2>2 tRESET 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the reset/release time for Definite Time (DT) and all IDMT curve
9. I2>2 2H Blocking Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting determines the enabling/disabling of blocking second stage Negative sequence overcurrent element due to presence of
inrush current.
If I2>2 Blocking and 2nd Harmonic both setting are enabled, then (I2>2) trip command will be blocked in case 2nd harmonics content in
any phase is above the 2ndHarm Thresh. and fundamental current is below I> lift 2H setting . (Set in SYSTEM CONFIG Menu.)

2.12.8.3 I2>3 Function


Sr. No Parameter Default setting Setting Range
Disabled / DT / IEC S Inverse / S Inverse
1.3Sec / IEC V Inverse / IEC E Inverse / UK
1. I2>3 Function IEC S Inverse LT Inverse / IEEE M Inverse / IEEE V Inverse
/ IEEE E Inverse / US Inverse / US ST
Inverse
This setting determines the tripping characteristic for the third stage Negative sequence overcurrent element.
If DT 1.0 to 35.00*In step 0.01*In
2. I2>3 Current Set 1.00*In
If IDMT 0.10 to 4.00*In step 0.01*In
This setting determines the pick-up setting for second third Negative sequence overcurrent element.
3. I2>3 Time Delay 1.00 S 0s to 200s step 0.01s
This setting determines the time-delay for the definite time setting if selected for third stage Negative sequence overcurrent element.
4. I2>3 TMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEC / UK IDMT characteristic.
5. I2>3 Time Dial 1.00 0.01 to 100 step 0.01s
This time multiplier setting is used to adjust the operating time of the IEEE / US IDMT curves.
6. tRESET Function DT DT/IDMT
This setting determines the type of reset/release characteristics. IDMT applicable for IEEE curves only.
7. I2>3 RTMS 1.000 0.025 to 1.2 step 0.005
This setting determines the reset/release time for IEEE IDMT characteristic
8. I2>3 tRESET 1.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting determines the reset/release time for Definite Time (DT) and all IDMT curve
9. I2>3 2H Blocking Disabled Enabled / Disabled
This setting determines the enabling/disabling of blocking third stage Negative sequence overcurrent element due to presence of inrush
current.
If I2>3 Blocking and 2nd Harmonic both setting are enabled, then (I2>3) trip command will be blocked in case 2nd harmonics content in
any phase is above the 2ndHarm Thresh. and fundamental current is below I> lift 2H setting . (Set in SYSTEM CONFIG Menu.)

P15D/EN M/C 7-23


7 Protection Parameter Settings P50 Agile P154

2.12.9 BROKEN CONDUCTOR Settings


Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges
1. BC Alarm Disabled Disabled / Enabled
This setting enables (activate) or disables (turn off) the Broken Conductor alarm.
2. I2/I1 Set-1 0.50 0.20 to 1.00 step 0.01
This setting determines the pick-up threshold of the negative to positive sequence current ratio for Broken Conductor alarm.
3. I2/I1 Time Dly-1 10.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting sets the time delay for the Broken Conductor alarm.
4. BC Trip Disabled Disabled / Enabled
This setting enables (activate) or disables (turn off) the Broken Conductor Trip function
5. I2/I1 Set-2 0.50 0.20 to 1.00 step 0.01
This setting determines the pick-up threshold of the negative to positive sequence current ratio for Broken Conductor Trip.
6. I2/I1 Time Dly-2 10.00 S 0s to 100s step 0.01s
This setting sets the time delay for Broken Conductor Trip.

2.12.10 CB FAIL Settings


Sr. No Parameter Defaults setting Setting / Ranges
1. CB Fail Status Enabled Disabled / Enabled
This setting enables (activate) or disables (turn off) the CB Fail Status
2. CB Fail Timer 0.1 S 0s to 50s step 0.01s
This setting sets the time delay in which the CB opening must be detected.
1=I< Only
2=CB Open + I<
3. CBF Reset CB Open + I<
3=Prot Reset + I<
4= CB Open
This setting determines the elements that will reset the CB fail timer for CB Failures
4. I< 1.00*In 0.05*In to 3.20*In step 0.01
This setting determines the current threshold, which will reset the CB Fail timer for Overcurrent based protection
5. IN< 1.00*In 0.05*In to 3.20*In step 0.01
This setting determines the current threshold, which will reset the CB Fail timer for Earth fault based protection
6. Remove I> Start Disabled Disabled / Enabled
This setting for removing phase overcurrent start signal following CBF operation
7. Remove IN> Start Disabled Disabled / Enabled
This setting for removing earth overcurrent start signal following CBF operation

2.12.11 VIEW RECORDS


Sr. No Parameter Display value on LCD
1. Fault Record Display the Records of fault i.e. parameter value, flag of fault & date and time of Fault
2. Event Record Display of all digital events with time stamping (max 512 events)
3. Maint Record Display of error generated by relay if any, in case of failure of hardware
4. Alarm Record Display of alarm generated by relay & date and time of generated alarm.

7-24 P15D/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 8 Monitoring & Control

MONITORING & CONTROL

CHAPTER 8

P154/EN M/C 8-1


8 Monitoring & Control P50 Agile P154

8-2 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 8 Monitoring & Control

1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter consists of the following sections:
1 Chapter Overview
2 Monitoring & Control
2.1 Monitoring Functions (Event, Fault, Disturbance Record)
2.1.1 Event Record
2.1.2 Alarm Record
2.1.3 Fault Record
2.1.4 Maintenance Record
2.1.5 Disturbance Record
2.2 Record Control
2.3 Display of Measuring Parameters
2.4 Opto Inputs
2.5 Output Relays
2.5.1 Output Relay Function Assignment
2.5.2 O/P Relay Configuration
2.5.3 O/P Contact Open Time
2.6 Programmable LEDs
2.7 Logic Equations
2.8 CB Monitoring
2.8.1 CB Open Supervision
2.8.2 CB Open Operation Alarm
2.9 CB Control
2.9.1 Local Control using IED Menu
2.9.2 Remote Control
2.10 Trip Circuit Supervision
2.10.1 Calculations for External Resistor
2.11 Self-Diagnostic Features
2.12 Watchdog Feature

P154/EN M/C 8-3


8 Monitoring & Control P50 Agile P154

2 MONITORING & CONTROL

2.1 Monitoring Functions (Event, Fault, Disturbance Record)


The IED logs three different types of record. These are Event, Fault and Disturbance records, which
are stored in the IEDs non-volatile memory. It is important to log records because this allows you to
establish the sequence of events that occurred, for example following a particular power system
condition.
The device is capable of storing up to:
• 512 event records (including Alarm/maintenance records)
• 5 Fault records
• 5 Disturbance records

When the available space is exhausted, the oldest record is automatically overwritten by the new one.
The IEDs internal clock provides a time tag for each event, to a resolution of 1 ms.
The VIEW RECORDS column contains details of these Event, Alarm, Fault and maintenance records,
which can be displayed on the IEDs front panel, although it is easier to view them using the settings
application software.
The device supports IEC 60870-5-103, Modbus and DNP3.0 protocol. In case IEC60870-5-
103/Modbus protocol is selected while ordering, then relay auto-detects IEC-60870-5-103 and
MODBUS command and responds in respective language. There is no specific setting which defines
the protocol selection between IEC60870-5-103 and Modbus.

2.1.1 Event Record


The Event record is generated when certain events happen. A change in any digital input signal or
protection element output signal causes an event record to be created. These events are generated
by the protection software and immediately time stamped. They are then transferred to non-volatile
memory for storage.
The device continuously monitors logical and physical status. There are six physical Binary inputs
provided, marked as S1, S2 up to S6. Any physical or logical change is recorded as event. These
events are stored in internal, non-volatile memory along with a time stamp. Some of the events
recorded include: Protection pickup, Relay Reset and CB Trip. A complete list can be found in protocol
document. Up to 512 such events can be stored and downloaded for detailed analysis. Details of the
event data are as follows:
Capacity: 512 events (including Alarm/maintenance records)
Time-tag: 1 millisecond
Triggers: Any selected protection alarm and threshold, Logic input change of state, Self-test
events and setting changes.
The user can view the event records either using the front panel interface, the USB port or remotely
using the rear EIA(RS)485 port.

8-4 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 8 Monitoring & Control

2.1.2 Alarm Record


The P154 logs any alarm conditions it generates as individual events. Details of the event are
displayed in the Alarm Record submenu under VIEW RECORDS menu.
A Time and Date stamp is always associated with the event in question and is displayed after the
event description. The alarms are stored in alarm record till the alarm is acknowledged by CLEAR key.

2.1.3 Fault Record


A fault record is triggered by any protection signal which trips the circuit breaker. If there are any fault
records, these will appear automatically in the VIEW RECORDS column. You can select the fault
record in the VIEW RECORDS column. A value of '01' corresponds to the latest fault record.
Information about the fault follows in the subsequent cells. The time stamp assigned to the fault record
itself is more accurate than the corresponding stamp of the event record, because the event is logged
after the actual fault record is generated. The fault measurements in the fault record are given at the
time of the protection Start.
After every fault relay latched fault data which can be viewed for detailed analysis. The following
details are applicable for fault record.
Capacity: 5 faults
Time-tag: 1 millisecond
Triggers: Any selected protection threshold.
Data: Fault number, Type of fault (stage / Phase / EF etc), Trip counter, Fault current magnitude
in Secondary, Trip Timing, Thermal state, Fault date and Fault time.

2.1.4 Maintenance Record


Internal failures detected by the self-monitoring circuitry, such as watchdog failure and alarms related
to CB operation are logged as maintenance records. If there are any maintenance records, these will
appear automatically in the VIEW RECORDS column. You can select the maintenance record in the
Maint Record submenu in the VIEW RECORDS column. The latest maintenance record is always
displayed at the top while navigating the Maint Record submenu.
The following details are applicable for maintenance data
Capacity : 100 records
Triggers : Any hardware error and CB Operation error
Data : Error Code, Error description and Date & Time

2.1.5 Disturbance Record


The disturbance recorder can record the waveforms of the calibrated analogue channels, as well as
the values of the digital signals. The disturbance recorder is supplied with data once per cycle, and
collates the received data into a disturbance record. The disturbance records can be extracted using
application software or the SCADA system, which can also store the data in COMTRADE format,
allowing the use of other packages to view the recorded data.
The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside for storing disturbance
records. Up to 5 such waveforms can be recorded; the duration of each disturbance record is 1sec.
The maximum total recording time is 5 seconds.
When the available memory is exhausted, the oldest records are overwritten by the newest ones. The
disturbance recorder stores the samples that are taken at a rate of 16 samples per cycle.
Each disturbance record consists of 5 analogue data channels and 37 digital data channels. The
relevant CT ratio for the analogue channels is also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities.
The relay records the waveform of the current along with all digital and logical status during a fault.
The disturbance record can be triggered from trip operation of relay. It is not possible to view the

P154/EN M/C 8-5


8 Monitoring & Control P50 Agile P154

disturbance records locally via the front panel LCD. This waveform can be downloaded via the
communication port for further analysis.
The fault recording is set by Trigger Position cell. The Trigger Position cell sets the trigger point as
a percentage of the duration.
The details of the disturbance record are as follows:
Capacity: 5 records of 1 sec each
Pre fault Trigger position: Programmable
Sampling rate: 16 samples / cycles
Triggers: Trip signals, external trigger via opto input assignment.
Data: 5 analogue channels and up to 37 digital channels (physical and logical
status).

2.2 Record Control


The data stored in Event/Fault/Maintenance/Disturbance Records can be cleared by enabling the
settings Clear Events/Clear Faults/Clear Maint/Clear Dist Recs in Record Control menu. The
Thermal State can be reset by enabling the Thermal Reset setting.

2.3 Display of Measuring Parameters


The device directly measures and calculates a number of system quantities, which are updated at
regular intervals. These values can be viewed in the MEASUREMENTS menu on the LCD screen
using the navigation keys on the front panel or using the P50 Agile configurator tool.
In normal conditions the relay displays Primary and Secondary current value of phases A, B, C and
earth current N as per phase/earth CT ratio within ±2% accuracy and Thermal state in %.
The device measures and displays the following quantities:
Parameter Unit Description
IA amp Primary current in phase A
IB amp Primary current in phase B
IC amp Primary current in phase C
IN1 amp Primary earth current (measured)
IN2 amp Primary earth current (derived)
ia amp Secondary current in phase A
ib amp Secondary current in phase B
ic amp Secondary current in phase C
in1 amp Secondary earth current (measured)
in2 amp Secondary earth current (derived)
i2 amp Secondary -ve phase sequence current
i1 amp Secondary +ve phase sequence current
I2/I1 % Ratio of I2/I1
Breaker Trip counter
TC count
(Count of number of trips issued by relay)
Breaker operation counter
BOC count (Count of total breaker operations-
local & relay tripping )
Breaker operating time
BOT millisecond (Breaker contact opening time for the latest
trip)

8-6 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 8 Monitoring & Control

Parameter Unit Description


Th State % Thermal state
Ia rms amp Secondary true RMS current in phase A
Ib rms amp Secondary true RMS current in phase B
Ic rms amp Secondary true RMS current in phase C

In the event of a fault, the type of the fault and fault current are displayed on LCD. The IED measures
the fault current and stores it in the non-volatile memory.

2.4 Opto Inputs


The device supports 6 numbers of opto-inputs. The use of these opto-inputs depends on the
application. There are a number of settings associated with the opto-inputs.
The relays have programmable opto-isolated logic inputs, which can be assigned to any available
function which are identified as Opto I/P 1 to Opto I/P 6. These inputs are used to acquire status of
external field signals such as CB close, CB open etc or can be programmed for function such as
external reset, External trigger to DR etc. by using P50 Configurator as well as relay user interface.
On the user interface, the Opto I/P can be assigned to any function from I/O configuration menu. The
function can be assigned to any input by entering the values to them either 0 or 1 i.e. 0 = not assigned
and 1 = assigned.
The following are the list of functions, which can be assigning to digital input.
Function Description
Rem. Rst. Function used to reset Latch type output contact and LED indication
CBF Init. Function used to Initiate Breaker Fail
Sel Grp2 Function used to enable Group 2 setting
Ext Trip Function initiates the relay assigned for Gen. Trip to operate and trip the CB.
DR Trig Function used to trigger Disturbance Record
CB (52A) Status used to detect CB Close position
CB (52B) Status used to detect CB Open position
Blk I>1 Function used to block tripping of O/C stage 1
Blk I>2 Function used to block tripping of O/C stage 2
Blk I>3 Function used to block tripping of O/C stage 3
Blk I2>1 Function used to block tripping of NPS stage 1
Blk I2>2 Function used to block tripping of NPS stage 2
Blk I2>3 Function used to block tripping of NPS stage 3
Blk IN1>1 Function used to block tripping of measured E/F stage 1
Blk IN1>2 Function used to block tripping of measured E/F stage 2
Blk IN1>3 Function used to block tripping of measured E/F stage 3
Blk IN2>1 Function used to block tripping of derived E/F stage 1
Blk IN2>2 Function used to block tripping of derived E/F stage 2
Blk IN2>3 Function used to block tripping of derived E/F stage 3
Blk BC Function used to block tripping of Broken Conductor
Blk THOL Function used to block tripping of Thermal Overload
Blk I< Function used to block tripping of Under Current
TCS Trig Status is used to monitor Trip Circuit Supervision

P154/EN M/C 8-7


8 Monitoring & Control P50 Agile P154

The Digital inputs are suitable for accepting AC or DC auxiliary supply. The selection for AC or DC
auxiliary supply is done from submenu Opto I/P under SYSTEM DATA menu.
The DI can be selectable for different operating voltage (ordering option) depending on the
application requirement.
For details regarding the operating voltage and its threshold values, please refer to the Technical
Specification section of this manual.

2.5 Output Relays


The device supports 6 numbers of relay output. The use of these relay outputs depends on the
application. There are a number of settings associated with the relay outputs.

2.5.1 Output Relay Function Assignment


The relays have configurable logic outputs, which can be assigned to any available function. The logic
outputs are identified as RL1 to RL6. All logic outputs have changeover contacts and can be
configured to change state on activation of the different functions available in the relay. A basic output
matrix is included in the P50 Agile configurator. Different functions can be assigned by using P50
Configurator as well as relay user interface. On the user interface, the output relays can be assigned
to any function from I/O configuration menu. The function can be assigned to any input by entering the
values to them either 0 or 1 i.e. 0 = not assigned and 1 = assigned.
The following diagram explains the assignment process to relay either by UI or P50 Configuration.

Figure 1: Output contact configuration logic


The following functions can be assigned to the relay contacts.
Function Description
Gen Strt General start
Strt L1 Start detected in phase A
Strt L2 Start detected in phase B
Strt L3 Start detected in phase C
Strt I>1 Start O/C stage 1
Strt I>2 Start O/C stage 2

8-8 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 8 Monitoring & Control

Function Description
Strt I>3 Start O/C stage 3
Strt I2>1 Start Neg seq. O/C stage 1
Strt I2>2 Start Neg seq. O/C stage 2
Strt I2>3 Start Neg seq. O/C stage 3
StrtIN1>1 Start Measured E/F stage 1
StrtIN1>2 Start Measured E/F stage 2
StrtIN1>3 Start Measured E/F stage 3
StrtIN2>1 Start Derived E/F stage 1
StrtIN2>2 Start Derived E/F stage 2
StrtIN2>3 Start Derived E/F stage 3
Strt BC Start Broken Conductor
THOL Alm Start Thermal Alarm
Strt CLP Start Cold load Pickup
Strt I< Start Under current
Strt CBF Start Breaker Failure
I> BCBF Block O/C protection during CB Fail
IN1> BCBF Block E/F protection during CB Fail
BC Alm Broken Conductor Alarm
CloseFail CB Close Fail Alarm (during control operation)
Open Fail CB Open Fail Alarm (during control operation)
Relay OK Relay healthy
Gen Trip General Trip
Trip L1 Trip in phase A
Trip L2 Trip in phase B
Trip L3 Trip in phase C
Trip I>1 Trip in O/C stage 1
Trip I>2 Trip in O/C stage 2
Trip I>3 Trip in O/C stage 3
Trip I2>1 Trip in Neg seq. O/C stage 1
Trip I2>2 Trip in Neg seq. O/C stage 3
Trip I2>3 Trip in Neg seq. O/C stage 2
TripIN1>1 Trip in Measured EF stage 1
TripIN1>2 Trip in Measured EF stage 2
TripIN1>3 Trip in Measured EF stage 3
TripIN2>1 Trip in Derived EF stage 1
TripIN2>2 Trip in Derived EF stage 2
TripIN2>3 Trip in Derived EF stage 3
BC Trip Trip in Broken Conductor
THOL Trip Trip in Thermal overload
CLP Trip in Cold load pickup
Trip I< Trip in Under Current
CBF Trip Trip in Breaker Fail
CBOpr Alm CB operation Alarm
OptoI/P 1 Opto Input 1

P154/EN M/C 8-9


8 Monitoring & Control P50 Agile P154

Function Description
OptoI/P 2 Opto Input 2
OptoI/P 3 Opto Input 3
OptoI/P 4 Opto Input 4
OptoI/P 5 Opto Input 5
OptoI/P 6 Opto Input 6
AndLogicA AND logic equation A
AndLogicB AND logic equation B
AndLogicC AND logic equation C
AndLogicD AND logic equation D
CB Trip Circuit Breaker Trip
CB Close Circuit Breaker Close
TCS Alarm Trip circuit supervision Alarm
CBOpn Sup CB Open supervision Alarm

Note: The above functions can be assigned to LEDs and AND Logic Equation.

2.5.2 O/P Relay Configuration


All relay contacts can be individually set as self-reset or latching.
The self-reset trip contact remains closed until the fault persists and opens only after fault current
become less than reset value. The latching type contact will close when a fault occurs and will remain
closed even if there is no fault persisting. The contact can be reset by pressing CLEAR key.
The selection of HR/SR type is made by changing bits value from 0 or 1 in O/P RELAY CONFIG menu
setting.
For Self-reset output contact set bit 0
For Latch type (HR) output contact set bit 1.

The bit position for relay contacts is as shown in following table.


RL-6 RL-5 RL-4 RL-3 RL-2 RL-1
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 is HR type & 0 is SR type

For example, if you select RL-1 to hand reset (latching) type and all other relay self-reset then you
have to select the configuration below.
RL-6 RL-5 RL-4 RL-3 RL-2 RL-1
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 is HR type & 0 is SR type

2.5.3 O/P Contact Open Time


This timer is used to hold relay contact after executing trip to ensure proper CB opening.
All digital outputs have a separate setting to set the contact open time. This timer is applicable only
when output contact is SR type.

8-10 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 8 Monitoring & Control

Figure 2: Output contact logic

2.6 Programmable LEDs


The device supports 4 numbers of programmable LEDs. All of the programmable LEDs on the unit are
bi-colour and can be set to RED or GREEN. The use of these LEDs depends on the application. There
are a number of settings associated with the relay outputs.
The programmable LEDs can be assigned to any available function. The programmable LEDs are
identified as L5 to L8. Different functions can be assigned by using P50 Configurator as well as relay
user interface. On the user interface, the LEDs can be assigned to any function from I/O
configuration menu. The function can be assigned to any input by entering the values to them either
0 or 1 i.e. 0 = not assigned and 1 = assigned.
The following diagram explains the assignment process of LEDs by either by UI or P50 Configuration.
Here G represents Green LED and R represents Red LED. Both are part of one command dual LED.

P154/EN M/C 8-11


8 Monitoring & Control P50 Agile P154

Figure 3: LEDs configuration logic


The functions that can be assigned to Green LED and Red LED are same to relay contact.
All Green LEDs and Red LEDs can be individually set as self-reset or latching
The selection of HR/SR type is made by changing bits value from 0 or 1 in O/P Contact
Configuration setting.
For Self-reset output contact, set bit 0
For Latch type (HR) output contact, set bit 1.
The bit position for Green LEDs is as shown in following table.
LG-8 LG-7 LG-6 LG-5
0 0 0 0 1 is HR type & 0 is SR type

The bit position for Red LEDs is as shown in following table.


LR-8 LR-7 LR-6 LR-5
0 0 0 0 1 is HR type & 0 is SR type

2.7 Logic Equations


The device supports 4 Logic AND equations which can be used to form Boolean functions using AND
operators. Any function available in the IO Mask can be assigned to any single equation. Maximum
numbers of signals that can be assigned to any equation depends on the number of functions
available in IO mask for assignment.
The Logic equations are identified as AndLogicA, AndLogicB, AndLogicC and AndLogicD.
Any protection functions, Control Operation and opto I/Ps can be assigned to the AND logic equations
and result of equation can be time delayed and assigned to any output relays and LEDs. The relevant
settings are available under O/P Relay configuration menu.
The signals available for mapping to an equation are same as available for Relay contacts and LEDs.

8-12 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 8 Monitoring & Control

Figure 4: AND logic equation


AND Logic application example
The figure below is an example for AND logic implementation in the relay. There are two inputs to the
AND equations, one is SF6 Gas low signal which is externally wired to Opto I/P 1 of relay and other
input is TCS Alarm which is internally generated signal. Both signals are assigned to AND logic
equation and when both the input signals are high, then the output of AND logic equation will be high.
This output can be used to block all protection functions through external wiring.

Figure 5: AND logic equation application example

2.8 CB Monitoring
Periodic maintenance of circuit breakers is necessary to ensure that the trip circuit and mechanism
operate correctly and also that the breaking capability has not been compromised due to previous fault
interruptions. Generally, such maintenance is based on a fixed time interval. These methods of
monitoring circuit breaker condition give a rough guide only and can provide early indications of
maintenance required. The relays record various statistics related to each circuit breaker trip
operation, allowing a more accurate assessment of the circuit breaker condition.
Relay records following circuit breaker operation statistics:-
Record in Measurement Description
BOT “Breaker Opening Time”- This is a circuit breaker opening time in ms.
BOC “Breaker Operation Counter”- This counter indicates numbers of CB operations.
TC “Trip Counter” -This counter indicates number of protection trips.

The above counters can be reset to zero, after maintenance inspection and overhaul.

2.8.1 CB Open Supervision


Slow CB operation indicates the need for mechanism maintenance. Alarm threshold (CB Open Time)
is provided to enforce this and can be set in the range of 50msec to 1 sec. This time relates to the
interrupting time of the circuit breaker and includes relay trip contact operating time, CB main contact
operation time and CB auxiliary contact operating time.
The relay starts internal timer as soon as any protection function is operated. Relay monitors the CB
open contact status and stops the timer as soon as the CB open feedback is received by the relay. If
this measured time is more than setting “CB Open Time”, then relay generates CB Open
Supervision alarm. An alarm message is displayed on LCD display and the START LED starts
blinking. The associated event is stored in Event Record. In the event the measured Breaker opening
time is less than the setting “CB Open Time”, the timer is reset and no alarm is generated.

P154/EN M/C 8-13


8 Monitoring & Control P50 Agile P154

Breaker opening time is displayed on the LCD display under MEASUREMENTS menu.
The CB Open Supervision logic is explained in following diagram:

Figure 6: CB open supervision logic

2.8.2 CB Open Operation Alarm


Every circuit breaker operation results in some degree of wear for its components. Therefore routine
maintenance, such as oiling of mechanisms, may be based on the number of operations. Suitable
setting of the maintenance threshold will allow an alarm to be raised, indicating when preventative
maintenance is due.
Some circuit breakers, such as oil circuit breakers (OCBs) can only perform a certain number of fault
interruptions before requiring maintenance attention. This is because each fault interruption causes
carbonising of the oil, degrading its dielectric properties. The maintenance alarm threshold (setting
CB Open operations) may be set to indicate the requirement for oil dielectric testing, or for more
comprehensive maintenance.
For each circuit breaker trip operation, the relay records statistics. The relay monitors the number of
circuit breaker operation by maintaining two types of counter (1) Breaker Trip counter which is based
on the number of trips issued by the relay and (2) Breaker Operation counter which is the count of
total breaker operations and based on the status change of CB auxiliary contact wired to one of the
relay opto inputs. The relay compares the Breaker Operation Counter (BOC) with CB Open
Operations (CB Open Oper) setting and generates CB Open Operation alarm when counter exceeds
the set value, indicating that the preventative maintenance is due. The alarm message is displayed on
LCD display and START LED starts blinking. The associated event is stored in Event Record.

2.9 CB Control
There are several types of circuit breaker;
• CBs with no auxiliary contacts
• CBs with 52A contacts (where the auxiliary contact follows the state of the CB)
• CBs with 52B contacts (where the auxiliary contact is in the opposite state the state of the CB)
• CBs with both 52A and 52B contacts

Circuit Breaker control is only possible if the circuit breaker in question provides auxiliary contacts.
For local control, the CB control by cell should be set accordingly.
The length of the trip and close control pulses can be set via the Open Pulse Time and Close Pulse
Time settings respectively. These should be set long enough to ensure the breaker has completed its
open or close cycle before the pulse has elapsed.
If an attempt to close the breaker is being made, and a protection trip signal is generated, the
protection trip command overrides the close command.
If the CB fails to respond to the control command (indicated by no change in the state of CB Status
inputs) an Open Fail alarm or Close Fail alarm is generated after the relevant trip or close pulses
have expired. These alarms can be viewed on the LCD display, remotely, or can be assigned to output
contacts.

8-14 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 8 Monitoring & Control

The control operations of CB such as CB Open and CB Close command is controlled locally through
relay HMI or Remote operation. Type of Control operation is enabled (i.e. Local, Remote or Local +
Remote) in the CB CONTROL menu.
The device includes the following options for control of a single circuit breaker:
• Local control using the IED menu
• Remote control using remote communication

2.9.1 Local Control using IED Menu


You can control manual opens and closes with the CB Open/Close cell in the SYSTEM DATA menu.
This can be set to 'No Operation', 'Open', or 'Close' accordingly.
For this to work you have to set the CB Control By cell to option 2: 'Local', or option 4:
'Local+Remote' in the CB CONTROL menu.

2.9.2 Remote Control


Remote CB control can be achieved by setting the CB Open/Close cell in the SYSTEM DATA column
to Open or Close by using a SCADA command to the rear interface RP1.
For this to work, you have to set the CB Control By cell to option 3: 'Remote', or option 4:
'Local+Remote', in the CB CONTROL menu.
We recommend that you allocate separate relay output contacts for remote CB control and protection
tripping. This allows you to select the control outputs using a simple local/remote selector switch as
shown below. Where this feature is not required the same output contact(s) can be used for both
protection and remote tripping.

Figure 7: Remote Control of Circuit Breaker

P154/EN M/C 8-15


8 Monitoring & Control P50 Agile P154

For CB OPEN command:

Once a CB Open command is received from local or remote the assigned relay contact for the CB trip
will operate. Simultaneously the relay starts monitoring the status of opto input 52B. If the status of
52B input is not high after the expiry of open pulse time (settable in the range of 0.1 to 50 sec), then
the relay output contact, which is assigned to CB Open fail, will operate. Simultaneously the relay will
generate an Open Fail alarm on the LCD display and the associated event will be stored in the Event
Record.
The operation of Open Fail is explained in following diagram:

Figure 8: CB open fail alarm


For CB CLOSE command:
Once a CB Close command is received from local or remote the assigned relay contact for the CB
close will operate. Simultaneously the relay starts monitoring the status of opto input 52A.If the status
of 52A input is not high after the expiry of close pulse time (settable in the range of 0.1 to 50 sec), then
the relay output contact, which is assigned to CB Close fail, will operate. Simultaneously the relay will
generate Close Fail alarm on the LCD display and the associated event will be stored in the Event
Record.
The operation of Close Fail is explained in following diagram:

Figure 9: CB close fail alarm

2.10 Trip Circuit Supervision


TCS scheme provides supervision of the trip coil with the breaker open or closed but does not provide
pre-closing supervision of the trip path. However, using two opto-inputs allows the IED to correctly
monitor the Trip Circuit. This can be done by assigning TCS Trig signal to the opto inputs, which are
connected to Circuit Breaker auxiliary contacts (52A and 52B).

Figure 10: Trip circuit supervision logic


The TCS scheme is also fully compatible with latched contacts as the supervision current will be
maintained through the 52B contact when the trip contact is closed.

8-16 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 8 Monitoring & Control

Figure 11: TCS Scheme


When the breaker is closed, supervision current passes through opto input 1 and the trip coil. When
the breaker is open current flows through opto input 2 and the trip coil. No supervision of the trip path
is provided whilst the breaker is open. Any fault in the trip path will only be detected on CB closing,
after the elapse of TCS timer available under CB CONTROL menu.

2.10.1 Calculations for External Resistor


As shown in the TCS scheme, optional resistors R1 and R2 can be added to prevent tripping of the
CB if either opto input is shorted.
The minimum sensing current required by opto coupler is 0.18 mA and the maximum current capacity
of opto coupler is 10 mA. For the safe operation, the current should be always between minimum
required current and maximum current capacity of opto coupler. The maximum current is limited by
internal resistor (RInt.) connected in series with opto coupler. The value of this internal resistor (RInt.)
is 82 KΩ (Ohm).
The supervision current is a lot less than the current required by the trip coil to trip a CB. The opto-
input limits this supervision current .If the opto-input were to be short-circuited however; it could be
possible for the supervision current to reach a level that could trip the CB. For this reason, optional
resistors R1 and R2 are often used to limit the current in the event of a short-circuited opto-input. It is
recommended to use 2.5 KΩ / 50 W resistor for all type of auxiliary power supply.

2.11 Self-Diagnostic Features


The P154 relay includes self-monitoring function to check the operation of its hardware and software
while in service. If there is a problem with the hardware or software, it is able to detect and report the
problem.
The relay continuously monitors the hardware and in the event detects any hardware fault/error;
corresponding error code is displayed on the LCD. These faults / errors are stored in the ‘Main’t Rec
Num= “and can be viewed from Maint Record submenu. Error log is stored as 16 bit integer.
As an example if RTC error occurs, error code/error log will be as under:
Error code : 0000 0000 0000 0100
Error log on LCD: 0004
If the error is cleared during the self-diagnostic procedure the corresponding error bit will be cleared.
The P154 internal errors are also indicated by a change in status of ON and OUT OF SERVICE LEDs.
For more details refer to the Troubleshooting chapter.

2.12 Watchdog Feature


The relay continuously monitors the healthiness of hardware and detects the hardware fault/error.
As soon as an internal fault is detected, ON LED changes from green to red and contact assigned to
‘Relay OK’ signal changes state.

P154/EN M/C 8-17


8 Monitoring & Control P50 Agile P154

The output contact assigned to ‘Relay OK’ signal remains in active state when the relay is Healthy, i.e.
NO contact will be in closed position and vice versa.
The output contact assigned to ‘Relay OK’ will become inactive in case any error is detected / failure
of auxiliary supply.
There are 6 nos. of programmable binary outputs (changeover type contacts) marked as RL1 to RL6.
Any binary output can be used as watchdog contact by assigning ‘Relay OK’ signal through ‘IO
CONFIGURATION’ setting or using ‘IO Mask’ function in P50 Agile Configurator.

8-18 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 9 SCADA Communications

SCADA COMMUNICATIONS

CHAPTER 9

P154/EN M/C 9-1


12 SCADA Communications P50 Agile P154

9-2 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 9 SCADA Communications

1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter consists of the following sections:

1 Chapter Overview
2 SCADA Communications
2.1 Modbus
2.1.1 Overview
2.1.1.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer
2.1.2 MODBUS Functions
2.1.2.1 Protocol Mapping
2.2 IEC60-870-5-103
2.2.1 Overview
2.2.2 Physical Connection and Link Layer
2.2.3 Initialisation
2.2.4 Time Synchronisation
2.2.5 Spontaneous Events
2.2.6 General Interrogation (GI)
2.2.7 Cyclic Measurements
2.2.8 Commands
2.2.9 Test Mode
2.2.10 Disturbance Records
2.2.11 Configuration
2.2.12 Protocol Mapping
2.3 DNP3.0
2.3.1 Overview
2.3.2 DNP V3.00 Device Profile
2.3.3 Implementation Table
2.3.4 Point List
2.3.4.1 Binary Input Points
2.3.4.2 Binary Output Status Points and Control Output Blocks
2.3.4.3 Binary Counters
2.3.4.4 Analog Inputs

P154/EN M/C 9-3


12 SCADA Communications P50 Agile P154

2 SCADA COMMUNICATIONS

2.1 Modbus
This section describes how the MODBUS standard is applied to the Px50 platform. It is not a
description of the standard itself. The level at which this section is written assumes that the reader is
already familiar with the MODBUS standard.
The MODBUS protocol is a master/slave protocol, defined and administered by the MODBUS
Organization. For further information on MODBUS and the protocol specifications please see the
Modbus web site (www.modbus.org).

2.1.1 Overview

2.1.1.1 Physical Connection and Link Layer

Only one option is available for connecting MODBUS.

• Rear serial port 1 - for permanent SCADA connection via EIA(RS)485


The MODBUS interface uses ‘RTU’ mode communication rather than ‘ASCII’ mode as this provides
more efficient use of the communication bandwidth. This mode of communication is defined by the
MODBUS standard.
The IED address and baud rate can be selected using the front panel menu or with P50 Agile
configurator.
When using a serial interface, the data format is: 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit (a total of 10 bits per
character).

2.1.2 MODBUS Functions

2.1.2.1 Protocol Mapping


The following MODBUS function codes are supported:
Code Function Name Addresses starts with
02 Read Input Status 1x addresses
03 Read Holding Registers 4x addresses
04 Read Input Registers 3x addresses
05 Force Single Coil 0x addresses
16 Preset Multiple Registers 4x addresses

• Exception Codes generated in case of an error:

Code MODBUS Response Name Product interpretation


01 Illegal Function Code The function code received in query is not supported by the IED.
02 Illegal Data Address The start address received in the query is not an allowable value.

Note: If the start address received is correct but


the range includes unsupported address,
then this error is produced.

9-4 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 9 SCADA Communications

Note: The addresses of the MODBUS registers start from 1 and the user may have to subtract 1 from the
addresses, depending on the Master station configuration.

Sr. No. Function Register No. of Format Reg. Address Map


Code Regs Type
1 Product 03
Information
Manufacturer 20-Bytes
10 R 40001 – 40010
Name ASCII
20-Bytes
Relay Name 10 R 40011 – 40020
ASCII
20-Bytes
Model 10 R 40021 – 40030
ASCII
20-Bytes
Version 10 R 40031 – 40040
ASCII
20-Bytes
Relay Description 10 R 40041 – 40050
ASCII

Sr. No. Function Register No. of Format Reg. Address


Code Regs Type Map
2 Relay 03
Configuration
Num Status (s) 1 16 bit R 40258
Num Controls (c) 1 16 bit R 40259
Num Parameters (p) 1 16 bit R 40260
Num Faults (f) 1 16 bit R 40261

Sr. No. Function Register No. of Format Reg. Address


Code Regs Type Map
3.a Time Synchronization 03/16
(Unicast/Broadcast)
Year 1 16 bit R/W 42049
Month- Day 1 16 bit R/W 42050
Hour, Min 1 16 bit R/W 42051
Milliseconds 1 16 bit R/W 42052

For Alstom P50 Agile relays on Modbus, time synchronization is possible via a broadcast command to
800H (4x02049 through 4x02052) .The format is inverted IEC 870-5-4 CP56Time2a

Words 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Year 00..99

2 Month Day of Week Day of Month 1..12 1..7 1..31


0 0 0 0
3 SU 0 0 Hours Iv 0 Minutes 0..23 0..59

4 Milliseconds Hi Milliseconds Lo 0..59999 (seconds + milliseconds)

P154/EN M/C 9-5


12 SCADA Communications P50 Agile P154

Su (=0 Standard , =1 Summer Time)


iv (=0 valid , =1 non valid or non synchronised in system case)
First Day of week is Monday
Sr. No. Function Register No. of Format Reg. Address
Code Regs Type Map
Status and
4 02
Logical Status
Gen Strt 1 1 bit R 12769
Strt L1 1 1 bit R 12770
Strt L2 1 1 bit R 12771
Strt L3 1 1 bit R 12772
Strt I>1 1 1 bit R 12773
Strt I>2 1 1 bit R 12774
Strt I>3 1 1 bit R 12775
Strt I2>1 1 1 bit R 12776
Strt I2>2 1 1 bit R 12777
Strt I2>3 1 1 bit R 12778
Strt IN1>1 1 1 bit R 12779
Strt IN1>2 1 1 bit R 12780
Strt IN1>3 1 1 bit R 12781
Strt IN2>1 1 1 bit R 12782
Strt IN2>2 1 1 bit R 12783
Strt IN2>3 1 1 bit R 12784
Strt BC 1 1 bit R 12785
THOL Alm 1 1 bit R 12786
Strt CLP 1 1 bit R 12787
Strt I< 1 1 bit R 12788
Strt CBF 1 1 bit R 12789
I> BCBF 1 1 bit R 12790
IN1> BCBF 1 1 bit R 12791
Test Mode 1 1 bit R 12792
CloseFail 1 1 bit R 12793
Open Fail 1 1 bit R 12794
Relay OK 1 1 bit R 12795
Gen Trip 1 1 bit R 12796
Trip L1 1 1 bit R 12797
Trip L2 1 1 bit R 12798
Trip L3 1 1 bit R 12799
Trip I>1 1 1 bit R 12800
Trip I>2 1 1 bit R 12801
Trip I>3 1 1 bit R 12802
Trip I2>1 1 1 bit R 12803
Trip I2>2 1 1 bit R 12804
Trip I2>3 1 1 bit R 12805
Trip IN1>1 1 1 bit R 12806
Trip IN1>2 1 1 bit R 12807

9-6 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 9 SCADA Communications

Sr. No. Function Register No. Format Reg. Address Map


Code of Type
Regs
Trip IN1>3 1 1 bit R 12808

Trip IN2>1 1 1 bit R 12809

Trip IN2>2 1 1 bit R 12810

Trip IN2>3 1 1 bit R 12811

Trip BC 1 1 bit R 12812

THOL Trip 1 1 bit R 12813

CLP 1 1 bit R 12814

Trip I< 1 1 bit R 12815

Trip CBF 1 1 bit R 12816

Ext Trip 1 1 bit R 12817

CBOpr Alm 1 1 bit R 12818

Opto I/P 1 1 1 bit R 12819

Opto I/P 2 1 1 bit R 12820

Opto I/P 3 1 1 bit R 12821


Opto I/P 4 1 1 bit R 12822
Opto I/P 5 1 1 bit R 12823
Opto I/P 6 1 1 bit R 12824
TCS Alarm 1 1 bit R 12825
Trip LED 1 1 bit R 12826
CBOpn Sup 1 1 bit R 12827
BC Alarm 1 1 bit R 12828

Sr.No. Function Register No. Format Reg. Address Map


Code of Type
Regs
5 Outputs 05
LED Reset 1 16 bit W 03025
Trip 1 16 bit W 03026
Close 1 16 bit W 03027
Output 1 1 16 bit W 03028
Output 2 1 16 bit W 03029
Output 3 1 16 bit W 03030
Output 4 1 16 bit W 03031
Output 5 1 16 bit W 03032
Output 6 1 16 bit W 03033

P154/EN M/C 9-7


12 SCADA Communications P50 Agile P154

Sr.No. Function Register No. Format Reg. Address Map


Code of Type
Regs
6 Parameters 04
IL1 2 32 bit Float R 33281– 33282
IL2 2 32 bit Float R 33283– 33284
IL3 2 32 bit Float R 33285 – 33286
IN1 2 32 bit Float R 33287 – 33288
IN2 2 32 bit Float R 33289 – 33290
I2 2 32 bit Float R 33291 – 33292
I1 2 32 bit Float R 33293 – 33294
Th State 2 32 bit Float R 33295 – 33296
I2/I1 2 32 bit Float R 33297 – 33298
L1-RMS 2 32 bit Float R 33299 – 33300
L2-RMS 2 32 bit Float R 33301– 33302
L3-RMS 2 32 bit Float R 33303– 33304
TC 2 32 bit Float R 33305– 33306
BOC 2 32 bit Float R 33307– 33308
BOT 2 32 bit Float R 33309– 33310

2.2 IEC60-870-5-103

2.2.1 Overview
The specification IEC 60870-5-103 (Telecontrol Equipment and Systems Part 5 Section 103:
Transmission Protocols), defines the use of standards IEC 60870-5-1 to IEC 60870-5-5, which were
designed for communication with protection equipment.
This section describes how the IEC 60870-5-103 standard is applied to the P154 relay. It is not a
description of the standard itself. The level at which this section is written assumes that the reader is
already familiar with the IEC 60870-5-103 standard.
This section should provide sufficient detail to enable understanding of the standard at a level required
by most users.
The IEC 60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the device as the slave device. The
device conforms to compatibility level 2, as defined in the IEC 60870-5-103.standard.
The following IEC 60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface:

• Initialization (reset)
• Time synchronisation
• Event record extraction
• General interrogation
• Cyclic measurements
• General commands
• Disturbance record extraction

2.2.2 Physical Connection and Link Layer


There is just one option for IEC 60870-5-103:

9-8 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 9 SCADA Communications

• Rear serial port 1- for permanent SCADA connection via RS485

The IED address and baud rate can be selected using the front panel menu or with P50 Agile
configurator.

2.2.3 Initialisation
Whenever the device has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have been changed,
a reset command is required to initialize the communications. The device will respond to either of the
two reset commands; Reset CU or Reset FCB (Communication Unit or Frame Count Bit). The
difference between the two commands is that the Reset CU command will clear any unsent messages
in the transmit buffer, whereas the Reset FCB command does not delete any messages.
The device will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5. The Cause of
Transmission (COT) of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB depending on the nature of
the reset command.
The relay will also produce a power up event, when the relay is powered up.

2.2.4 Time Synchronisation


The time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the IEC 60870-5-103 protocol.
The device will correct the transmission delay depending on communication speed. For this,
transmission time, required for the time synchronization frame from the Master to IED, considering
current baud rate is added in the received time.
The device will correct the transmission delay depending on baud rate. If the time synchronisation
message is sent as a send/confirm message then the device will respond with a confirm message. A
time synchronisation Class 1 event will be generated/produced whether the time-synchronisation
message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply) message.

2.2.5 Spontaneous Events


Events are categorized using the following information:

• Function type
• Information Number

The IEC 60870-5-103 profile contains a complete listing of all events produced by the device.

2.2.6 General Interrogation (GI)


The GI request can be used to read the status of the device, the function numbers, and information
numbers that will be returned during the GI cycle. These are shown in the IEC 60870-5-103 profile.

2.2.7 Cyclic Measurements


The device will produce measured values using ASDU9 and ASDU9 is reported with information
number 148 and 155. This can be read from the device using a Class 2 poll. For every query, the
current online data is reported.
The device transmits its measurands at 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value.

2.2.8 Commands
The list of commands supported P154 relay is given in table below. The device will respond to valid
Control Command with ASDU1 and a cause of transmission indicating ‘Positive (COT-20) / Negative
(COT-21) acknowledgement’. The device will respond to commands with invalid FUN/ INF
combination with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission indicating ‘negative acknowledgement’.

P154/EN M/C 9-9


12 SCADA Communications P50 Agile P154

2.2.9 Test Mode


It is possible to enable test mode in the relay using either the front panel menu or with P50 Agile
configurator. An event will be produced to indicate both entry to and exit from test mode. Spontaneous
events and cyclic measured data transmitted whilst the device is in test mode will have a COT of ‘test
mode’.

2.2.10 Disturbance Records

The disturbance records are stored in uncompressed format and can be extracted using the standard
mechanisms described in IEC 60870-5-103. This relay supports up-to 5 records.

2.2.11 Configuration
To configure the IED for this protocol, please see the Configuration chapter.

2.2.12 Protocol Mapping


Sr. No. INF Description GI TYP COT FUN

1 Semantics of INFORMATION NUMBER : System Functions in monitor direction


0 End of general interrogation - 8 10 255
0 Time synchronization - 6 8 255
2 Reset FCB - 5 3 160
3 Reset CU - 5 4 160
4 Start/Restart - 5 5 160
5 Power on - 5 6 160

Sr. No. INF Description GI TYP COT FUN


2 Semantics of INFORMATION NUMBER : Status Indications in monitor direction
19 Trip LED X 1 1,7,9,20,21 160
22 Local parameter setting X 1 11,12 160
27 Opto I/P-1 X 1 1,7,9 160
28 Opto I/P-2 X 1 1,7,9 160
29 Opto I/P-3 X 1 1,7,9 160
30 Opto I/P-4 X 1 1,7,9 160
31 Opto I/P-5 X 1 1,7,9 127
32 Opto I/P-6 X 1 1,7,9 127
36 TCS Alarm X 1 1,7,9 160
134 Password Reset - 2 1,7 124
135 CBOpr Alm X 2 1,7,9 124

Note: ‘X’ under GI heading means DI Status is included in General Interrogation response.

9-10 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 9 SCADA Communications

Sr. No. INF Description GI TYP COT FUN

3 Semantics of INFORMATION NUMBER : Fault indications in monitor direction

84 Gen Strt X 2 1,7,9 160


64 Strt L1 X 2 1,7,9 160
65 Strt L2 X 2 1,7,9 160
66 Strt L3 X 2 1,7,9 160
117 Strt I>1 X 2 1,7,9 126
103 Strt I>2 X 2 1,7,9 126
105 Strt I>3 X 2 1,7,9 126
126 Strt I2>1 X 2 1,7,9 126
146 Strt I2>2 X 2 1,7,9 126
147 Strt I2>3 X 2 1,7,9 126
143 Strt IN1>1 X 2 1,7,9 126
144 Strt IN1>2 X 2 1,7,9 126
145 Strt IN1>3 X 2 1,7,9 126
140 Strt IN2>1 X 2 1,7,9 126
141 Strt IN2>2 X 2 1,7,9 126
142 Strt IN2>3 X 2 1,7,9 126
25 Strt BC X 2 1,7,9 124
200 THOL Alm - 2 1,7,9 126
21 Strt CLP - 2 1,7,9 124
178 Strt I< X 2 1,7,9 126
26 Strt CBF X 2 1,7,9 124
154 I> BCBF - 2 1,7 124
155 IN1> BCBF - 2 1,7 124
22 Test Mode - 2 1,7 124
156 CloseFail - 2 1,7 124
157 Open Fail - 2 1,7 124
145 Relay OK - 2 1,7 127
68 Gen Trip - 2 1,7 160
69 Trip L1 - 2 1,7 160
70 Trip L2 - 2 1,7 160
71 Trip L3 - 2 1,7 160
90 Trip I>1 - 2 1,7 160
91 Trip I>2 - 2 1,7 160
104 Trip I>3 - 2 1,7 126
158 Trip I2>1 - 2 1,7 124
127 Trip I2>2 - 2 1,7 126
128 Trip I2>3 - 2 1,7 126
123 Trip IN1>1 - 2 1,7 126
124 Trip IN1>2 - 2 1,7 126
125 Trip IN1>3 - 2 1,7 126
92 Trip IN2>1 - 2 1,7 160
93 Trip IN2>2 - 2 1,7 160

P154/EN M/C 9-11


12 SCADA Communications P50 Agile P154

Sr. No. INF Description GI TYP COT FUN


121 Trip IN2>3 - 2 1,7 126
9 Trip BC - 2 1,7 124
202 THOL Trip - 2 1,7 126
225 CLP - 2 1,7 126
177 Trip I< - 2 1,7 126
85 CBF Trip - 2 1,7 160
2 Ext Trip - 2 1,7 124
1 CBOpn Sup - 2 1,7 124
3 BC Alarm - 2 1,7 124

Sr. No. INF Description GI TYP COT FUN


5 Semantics of INFORMATION NUMBER : Measurands in monitor direction
148 Measurand IL 1,2,3 - 9 2, 7 160
155 IN1, Th State, IN2, I2, I1, I2/I1 - 9 2,7 160
Ratio, IrmsR, IrmsY, IrmsB.
1 Trip Counter, Breaker - 244 2,7 127
Operation Counter, Breaker
Operating Time

Note: The measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a proportion of 2.4 times of the rated value of
the analogue value.

Sr. INF Description GI TYP COT FUN


No.
6 Semantics of INFORMATION NUMBER: Fault list in monitor direction
0 List of Recorded DR - 23 31 160

Sr. No. INF Description


7 Semantics of Actual Channel : Used for DR Transmission
ACC Description
1 IL1 - Primary
2 IL2
3 IL3
4 IN2 (Derived)
74 IN1 (Measured)

Sr. No. INF Description GI TYP COT FUN


8 Semantics of INFORMATION NUMBER : System Functions in control direction
0 Initialization of general interrogation - 7 9 255
0 Time synchronization - 6 8 255

Sr. No. INF Description GI TYP COT FUN


9 Semantics of INFORMATION NUMBER : General commands in control direction
19 LED Reset ON 20 20 160
124 Trip ON/OFF 20 20 127

9-12 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 9 SCADA Communications

125 Close ON/OFF 20 20 127


94 Output 1 ON/OFF 20 20 127
95 Output 2 ON/OFF 20 20 127
96 Output 3 ON/OFF 20 20 127
97 Output 4 ON/OFF 20 20 127
98 Output 5 ON/OFF 20 20 127
99 Output 6 ON/OFF 20 20 127

2.3 DNP3.0

2.3.1 Overview
This section describes the specific implementation of the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP 3.0) in
P154 – Feeder protection relay.
It uses Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave Source Code Library Version 3.17.
This document is to be referred in conjunction with the DNP3.0 Basic 4 Document Set, and the DNP
Subset Definitions Document, for complete information on how to communicate with P154 using
DNP3.0 protocol.
This implementation of DNP3.0 is fully compliant with DNP3.0 Subset Definition Level 2 and contains
many Subset Level 3 features including some functionality beyond Subset Level 3.

2.3.2 DNP V3.00 Device Profile


The following table provides a “Device Profile Document” in the standard format defined in the DNP
3.0 Subset Definition Document. While it is referred to in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definition as a
“Document”, it is only a component of a total interoperability guide. This table, in combination with the
following should provide a complete interoperability/configuration guide for P154.
This table in combination with the following should provide a complete interoperability/configuration
guide for the P154 relays:

• The Implementation Table provided in Section 2.3.3


• The Point List Tables provided in Section 2.3.4

DNP V3.00
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT

Vendor Name: Alstom Grid

Device Name: P50 Platform using the Triangle MicroWorks, Inc. DNP 3.0 Slave
Source Code Library, Version 3.17.

Highest DNP Level Supported: Device Function:

For Requests: Level 2  Master Slave


For Responses: Level 2

P154/EN M/C 9-13


12 SCADA Communications P50 Agile P154

Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels
supported (the complete list is described in the attached table):

For static (non-change-event) object requests, request qualifier codes 00 and 01 (start-stop),
07 and 08 (limited quantity), and 17 and 28 (index) are supported in addition to request
qualifier code 06 (no range – or all points).

Static object requests received with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with
qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests received with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded
with qualifiers 17 or 28.

For change-event object requests, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.

16-bit and 32-bit Analog Change Events with Time may be requested.

The read function code for Object 50 (Time and Date), variation 1, is supported.

Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets): Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):

Transmitted: 2048
Transmitted: 292 Received: 2048
Received: 292

Maximum Data Link Re-tries: Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:

 None  None
 Fixed at 2  Configurable
 Configurable

Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:

 Never
 Always
 Sometimes
 Configurable

Requires Application Layer Confirmation:

 Never
 Always (not recommended)
 When reporting Event Data (Slave devices only)
 When sending multi-fragment responses (Slave devices only)
 Sometimes
 Configurable

9-14 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 9 SCADA Communications

Timeouts while waiting for:

Data Link Confirm:  None  Fixed at 100ms  Variable  Configurable


Complete Appl. Fragment:  None  Fixed at _______  Variable  Configurable
Application Confirm:  None  Fixed at 1s  Variable  Configurable
Complete Appl. Response:  None  Fixed at _______  Variable  Configurable

Others:
Binary Input change scanning period: 2ms
Analog Input change scanning period: 1s

Sends/Executes Control Operations:

WRITE Binary Outputs  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable


SELECT/OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
DIRECT OPERATE - NO ACK  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable

Count > 1  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable


Pulse On  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Pulse Off  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Latch On  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable
Latch Off  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable

Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable


Clear Queue  Never  Always  Sometimes  Configurable

Reports Binary Input Change Events when no Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events
specific variation requested: when no specific variation requested:

 Never  Never
 Only time-tagged  Binary Input Change With Time
 Only non-time-tagged  Binary Input Change With Relative Time
 Configurable  Configurable (attach explanation)

P154/EN M/C 9-15


12 SCADA Communications P50 Agile P154

Sends Unsolicited Responses: Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:

 Never  Never
 Configurable (attach explanation)  When Device Restarts
 Only certain objects  When Status Flags Change
 Sometimes (attach explanation)
No other options are permitted.
 ENABLE/DISABLE
UNSOLICITED Function codes
supported

Default Counter Object/Variation: Counters Roll Over at:

 No Counters Reported Point Index Name/Description Roll Over value


 Configurable (attach explanation) 0 BOC Settable up to 30000
 Default Object: 20 1 TC 9999

 Default Variation: 5
 No Counters Reported
 Point-by-point list attached
 Configurable (attach explanation)
 16 Bits
 32 Bits
 Other Value
 Point-by-point list attached

Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:  Yes  No

9-16 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 9 SCADA Communications

2.3.3 Implementation Table


The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the P154 in
both request messages and in response messages.
For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be
responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be
responded with qualifiers 17 or 28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always
responded.
In the table below, the text shaded as indicates Subset Level 3 functionality (beyond
Subset Level 2) and text shaded as indicates functionality beyond Subset Level 3.

REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(Library will parse) (Library will respond with)
Function
Object Variation Function Qualifier Qualifier
Description Codes
Number Number Codes (dec) Codes (hex) Codes (hex)
(dec)
Binary Input 00, 01 (start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to 06 (no range, or all)
1 0 1 (read)
request default 07, 08 (limited qty)
variation) 17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
1 (default – 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
1 Binary Input
see note 1) 22 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Binary Input with 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
1 2 1 (read)
Status 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
Binary Input Change 1 (read)
(Variation 0 06 (no range, or all)
2 0 07, 08 (limited qty)
is used to request
default variation)
1 Binary Input Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
2
without Time 07, 08 (limited qty)

2 (default – Binary Input Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
2 07, 08 (limited qty)
see note 1) with Time
1 (read)
Binary Output Status 00, 01 (start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to 06 (no range, or all)
10 0
request default 07, 08 (limited qty)
variation) 17, 28 (index)

1 (read) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)


00, 01 (start-stop) 17, 28 (index –
2 (default – 06 (no range, or all)
10 Binary Output Status see note 2)
see note 1) 07, 08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)

3 (select) 129 (response) Echo of request


00, 01 (start-stop)
1 (default – Control Relay Output 4 (operate) 07, 08 (limited qty)
12
see note 1) Block 5 (direct op) 17, 28 (index)
6 (dir.op,noack)

P154/EN M/C 9-17


12 SCADA Communications P50 Agile P154

OBJECT REQUEST RESPONSE


(Library will parse) (Library will respond with)
Object Variation Description Function Qualifier Function Qualifier
Number Number Codes (dec) Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex)
20 0 Binary Counter 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(Variation 0 is 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all)
used to request 8 (freezenoack) 07, 08 (limited qty)
default variation) 9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
20 1 32-Bit Binary 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Counter 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10(frz. cl. Noack)
20 2 16-Bit Binary 1 (read) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
00, 01 (start-stop)
Counter 7 (freeze) 17, 28 (index –
06 (no range, or all)
8 (freeze noack) see note 2)
07, 08 (limited qty)
9 (freeze clear)
17, 28 (index)
10 (frz.cl. Noack)
20 5 32-Bit Binary 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – Counter without 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 1) Flag 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
20 6 16-Bit Binary 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
Counter without 7 (freeze) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
Flag 8 (freeze noack) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
9 (freeze clear) 17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. Noack)
22 0 Counter change 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
Event
07, 08 (limited qty)

22 1 (default – 32-Bit Counter 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index –
see note 1) Change Event 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
without Time

22 2 16-Bit Counter 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index –
Change Event 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
without Time

22 5 32-Bit Counter 1 (read) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index –


06 (no range, or all)
Change Event with see note 2)
07, 08 (limited qty)
Time

OBJECT REQUEST RESPONSE


(Library will parse) (Library will respond with)
Object Variation Description Function Qualifier Function Qualifier
Number Number Codes (dec) Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex)
22 6 16-Bit Counter 1 (read) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index –
06 (no range, or all)
Change Event with see note 2)
07, 08 (limited qty)
Time

30 0 Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop)


(Variation 0 is used 06 (no range, or all)
to request default 07, 08 (limited qty)
variation) 17, 28 (index)
30 1 32-Bit Analog Input 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
30 2 16-Bit Analog Input 1(read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)

9-18 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 9 SCADA Communications

30 3 32-Bit Analog Input 1(read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – without Flag 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
see note 1) 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
30 4 16-Bit Analog Input 1(read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
without Flag 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
30 5 Single-precision, 1(read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
floating-point with 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
flag 07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
32 0 Analog Change 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
Event (Variation 07, 08 (limited qty)
0 is used to request
default variation)
32 1 32-Bit Analog 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
(default – Change Event 07, 08 (limited qty)
see note 1) without Time
32 2 16-Bit Analog 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Change Event 07, 08 (limited qty)
without Time
32 3 32-Bit Analog 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Change Event with 07, 08 (limited qty)
Time
32 4 16-Bit Analog 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
Change Event with 07, 08 (limited qty)
Time
32 7 Single-precision, 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17, 28 (index)
floating-point with 07, 08 (limited qty)
time

REQUEST RESPONSE
OBJECT
(Library will parse) (Library will respond with)
Object Variation Function Qualifier Function Qualifier
Description
Number Number Codes (dec) Codes (hex) Codes (dec) Codes (hex)
50 0 Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
07, 08 (limited qty) see note 2)
17, 28 (index)
50 1(default – Time and Date 1 (read) 00, 01 (start-stop) 129 (response) 00, 01 (start-stop)
see note 2 (write) 06 (no range, or all) 17, 28 (index –
1) 07 (limited qty=1) see note 2)
08 (limited qty)
17, 28 (index)
60 0 Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all)
Data
60 1 Class 0 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17,28

60 2 Class 1 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17,28


07, 08 (limited qty)
60 3 Class 2 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17,28
07, 08 (limited qty)
60 4 Class 3 Data 1 (read) 06 (no range, or all) 129 (response) 17,28
07, 08 (limited qty)
80 1 Internal Indications 2 (write) 00 (start-stop) 129 (response) 17,28
(index must =7)
No Object (function 13 (cold restart)
code only)
No Object (function
14 (warm restart)
code only)
No Object (function
23 (delay meas.)
code only)

P154/EN M/C 9-19


12 SCADA Communications P50 Agile P154

Note 1: A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0,
1, 2, or 3 scans.

Note 2: For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent
with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06,
07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. (For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28
are always responded.)

2.3.4 Point List


The tables in the following sections identify all the individual data points provided by this
implementation of DNP 3.0.

2.3.4.1 Binary Input Points


All Binary Input Status points are included in class 0 polls, because they are included in one of classes
1, 2 or 3.
Binary Input Points
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Binary Input without status flags)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2

Point Name/Description Initial value Changes Event


Index class(1,2,3)
0 LED Reset 0 2
1 Opto I/P-1 0 2
2 Opto I/P-2 0 2
3 Opto I/P-3 0 2
4 Opto I/P-4 0 2
5 Opto I/P-5 0 2
6 Opto I/P-6 0 2
7 CB Operation Alarm 0 1
8 CB Open Supervision 0 1
9 TCS 0 1
10 Test Mode 0 1
11 General start/ pick-up 0 1
12 Start L1 0 1
13 Start L2 0 1
14 Start L3 0 1
15 Start I>1 0 1
16 Start I>2 0 1
17 Start I>3 0 1
18 Start I2>1 0 1
19 Start I2>2 0 1

9-20 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 9 SCADA Communications

20 Start I2>3 0 1
21 Start IN1>1 0 1
22 Start IN1>2 0 1
23 Start IN1>3 0 1
24 Start IN2>1 0 1
25 Start IN2>2 0 1
26 Start IN2>3 0 1
27 Start BRC 0 1
28 Th Alarm 0 1
29 CLP Timer in progress 0 1
30 Start I< 0 1
31 Start CB Fail 0 1
32 I> Blk by CBF 0 1
33 IN1> Blk by CBF 0 1
34 BRC Alarm 0 1
35 CB Close Fail 0 1
36 CB Open Fail 0 1
37 Relay OK 0 1
38 General Trip 0 1
39 Trip L1 0 1
40 Trip L2 0 1
41 Trip L3 0 1
42 Trip I>1 0 1
43 Trip I>2 0 1
44 Trip I>3 0 1
45 Trip I2>1 0 1
46 Trip I2>2 0 1
47 Trip I2>3 0 1
48 Trip IN1>1 0 1
49 Trip IN1>2 0 1
50 Trip IN1>3 0 1
51 Trip IN2>1 0 1
52 Trip IN2>2 0 1
53 Trip IN2>3 0 1
54 Trip BRC 0 1
55 Th Trip 0 1
56 CLP 0 1
57 Trip I< 0 1
58 Trip CB Fail 0 1
59 External Trip 0 1

2.3.4.2 Binary Output Status Points and Control Output Blocks


The following table lists both the Binary Output Status Point (Object 10) and the Control Relay Output
Blocks (Objects 12).

P154/EN M/C 9-21


12 SCADA Communications P50 Agile P154

Binary Output Status Points


Object Number: 10
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
Control Relay Output Blocks
Object Number: 12
Request Function Codes supported: 3 (select), 4 (operate),5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)

Point Name/Description Initial status Supported control relay


Index value output block fields
0 LED Reset 0 Pulse ON
1 Trip 0 Pulse ON
2 Close 0 Pulse ON
3 Output 1 0 Pulse ON
4 Output 2 0 Pulse ON
5 Output 3 0 Pulse ON
6 Output 4 0 Pulse ON
7 Output 5 0 Pulse ON
8 Output 6 0 Pulse ON

2.3.4.3 Binary Counters


The following table lists Binary Counters (Object 20). All binary counter points are included in class 0
polls, because they are included in one of classes 1, 2 or 3.

Binary Counters
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20
Change Event Object Number: 22
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 5 (32-bit, unsigned integer count value without flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-bit, unsigned integer count value, with
flag)

Point Name/Description Initial value Initial Change


Index Event Class (1, 2, 3 or none)
0 BOC 0 3
1 TC 0 3

2.3.4.4 Analog Inputs


The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). All Analog Input point is included in class 0 polls,
because they are included in one of classes 1, 2 or 3.

Analog Inputs
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30
Change Event Object Number: 32
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input without flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Change Event without

9-22 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 9 SCADA Communications

Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: The scan rate for analog input change events is fixed at 1s

Point Name/Description Initial value Initial Change


Index Event Class (1, 2, 3 or
none)
0 IN1 0 3
1 IL 1 0 3
2 IL 2 0 3
3 IL 3 0 3
4 Th State 0 3
5 IN2 0 3
6 I2 0 3
7 I1 0 3
8 I2/I1 (see note 4) 0 3
9 L1-RMS 0 3
10 L2-RMS 0 3
11 L3-RMS 0 3
12 BOT 0 3

Note 3: The measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as primary values.

Note 4: I2/I1 multiplied by 1000.

P154/EN M/C 9-23


12 SCADA Communications P50 Agile P154

9-24 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 10 Installation

INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 10

P154/EN M/C 10-1


10 Installation P50 Agile P154

10-2 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 10 Installation

1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter consists of the following sections:

1 Chapter Overview
2 Installation
2.1 Handling the Goods
2.1.1 Receipt of the Goods
2.1.2 Unpacking the Goods
2.1.3 Storing the Goods
2.1.4 Dismantling the Goods
2.2 Mounting the Device
2.2.1 Flush Panel Mounting
2.3 Relay Connection
2.3.1.1 Relay Operating Condition
2.3.1.2 Current Transformer (CT) Circuit
2.3.1.3 Insulation and dielectric strength testing
2.3.2 Cables and Connectors
2.3.3 Terminal Blocks
2.3.3.1 CT/Auxiliary power/Input/ Output connections
2.3.3.2 Rear Serial Port connection
2.3.3.3 Power Supply Connections
2.3.3.4 Earth Connection
2.3.3.5 Current Transformers
2.3.3.6 EIA(RS) 485 Connections
2.3.3.7 Output Relay Connections
2.3.3.8 USB Connection
2.4 Case dimensions

P154/EN M/C 10-3


10 Installation P50 Agile P154

2 INSTALLATION

2.1 Handling the Goods


Our products are of robust construction but require careful treatment before installation on site. This
section discusses the requirements for receiving and unpacking the goods, as well as associated
considerations regarding product care and personal safety.

Caution: Before lifting or moving the equipment you should be familiar with the Safety
Information chapter of this manual.

2.1.1 Receipt of the Goods


On receipt, ensure the correct product has been delivered. Unpack the product immediately to ensure
there has been no external damage in transit. If the product has been damaged, make a claim to the
transport contractor and notify us promptly.
For products not intended for immediate installation, repack them in their original delivery packaging.

2.1.2 Unpacking the Goods


When unpacking and installing the product, take care not to damage any of the parts and make sure
that additional components are not accidentally left in the packing or lost. Do not discard any
CDROMs or technical documentation. These should accompany the unit to its destination substation
and put in a dedicated place.
The site should be well lit to aid inspection, clean, dry and reasonably free from dust and excessive
vibration. This particularly applies where installation is being carried out at the same time as
construction work.

2.1.3 Storing the Goods


If the unit is not installed immediately, store it in a place free from dust and moisture in its original
packaging. Keep any de-humidifier bags included in the packing. The de-humidifier crystals lose their
efficiency if the bag is exposed to ambient conditions. Restore the crystals before replacing it in the
carton. Bags should be placed on flat racks and spaced to allow circulation around them. The time
taken for regeneration will depend on the size of the bag. If a ventilating, circulating oven is not
available, when using an ordinary oven, open the door on a regular basis to let out the steam given off
by the regenerating silica gel. On subsequent unpacking, make sure that any dust on the carton does
not fall inside. Avoid storing in locations of high humidity. In locations of high humidity the packaging
may become impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier crystals will lose their efficiency.
The device can be stored between –25º to +70ºC.

2.1.4 Dismantling the Goods

If you need to dismantle the device, always observe standard ESD (Electrostatic Discharge)
precautions.
The minimum precautions to be followed are as follows:

• Use an antistatic wrist band earthed to a suitable earthing point.


• Avoid touching the electronic components and PCBs.

10-4 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 10 Installation

2.2 Mounting the Device


The products are available for flush panel mounting only

2.2.1 Flush Panel Mounting


P154 supports flush panel mounting and can be mounted into panels using fitting clamps with M5 X 10
screws.
The fitting clamp and screws are supplied along with the relay.
For mounting the relay in to the panel follow this procedure:

1. By loosening the M5 x 10 screws, remove the fitting clamps on the relay and then insert the
Relay in to the panel cut-out as show below.

Figure 1: Inserting relay in to the panel cutout

2. After inserting the Relay in the panel using the fitting clamps and the M5 x 10 screws, fasten
the relay to the panel as shown below.

Figure 2: Tightening fitting clamps

Caution: All screws of fitting clamps to be properly tightened. Always use


M5x10 screws for fitting the clamps.

P154/EN M/C 10-5


10 Installation P50 Agile P154

3. The Relay after fastening to the Panel with the help of Fitting clamps and the M5 x 10 Screws
is shown below.

Figure 3: Relay mounted on the panel-front view

Figure 4: Relay mounted on the panel-rear view

2.3 Relay Connection


Before installation of the relay check the correct working procedure as to ensure safety. The Terminal
exposed during installation may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically
isolated. Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts to hazardous voltage. Electronic parts
may be damaged if suitable electrostatic discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken. Voltage and
current connection should be made using insulated crimp termination to ensure that terminal block
insulation requirements are maintained for safety. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the
correct crimp terminal and tool for wire size should be used. The equipment must be connected in
accordance with the appropriate connection diagram.

10-6 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 10 Installation

Before energizing following should be checked


1. Voltage rating and polarity.
2. CT circuit rating and integrity of connection.
3. Protective fuse rating.
4. Integrity of the earthing connection.
5. Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable as per application.

2.3.1.1 Relay Operating Condition


The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits.

2.3.1.2 Current Transformer (CT) Circuit


Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT as the high voltage produce may be lethal to personnel
and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted
before opening any connection to it.

2.3.1.3 Insulation and dielectric strength testing


Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part
test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, as this may result in
damage.

2.3.2 Cables and Connectors


This section describes the type of wiring and connections that should be used when installing the
device. For pin-out details please refer to the wiring diagrams.

Caution: Before carrying out any work on the equipment you should be familiar with the
Safety Section and the ratings on the equipment’s rating label.

Figure 5: P154 rear view-terminal connection

P154/EN M/C 10-7


10 Installation P50 Agile P154

2.3.3 Terminal Blocks

2.3.3.1 CT/Auxiliary power/Input/ Output connections


The P50 Agile devices use terminal blocks as shown below. The terminal block consists of up to 18 x
M5 screw terminals and 32 x M4 screw terminals. M5 terminal blocks are used for CT connections and
M4 terminal blocks are used for auxiliary power/ input/output connections. The wires should be
terminated with rings using 90° ring terminals, with no more than two rings per terminal. The product is
supplied with sufficient M5 & M4 screws for proper connection.

M4 0erminal block M5 0erminal block

V01459

Figure 6: Terminal blocks

Caution: Always fit an insulating sleeve over the ring terminal.

2.3.3.2 Rear Serial Port connection


The rear serial port is intended for use with a permanently wired connection to a remote SCADA
system. The physical connectivity is achieved using three screw terminals: C3, C4 terminals for signal
connection, and C5 terminal for connecting cable shield. The terminal block is located at the rear of
the relay as shown below.

Figure 7: Rear Serial port terminal block

2.3.3.3 Power Supply Connections

These should be wired with 1.5 mm PVC insulated multi-stranded copper wire terminated with M4 ring
terminals. The wire should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 V RMS.
As per the application, in case auxiliary supply input of the relay needs to be wired, then adequate
care should be taken to wire as per polarity marking on the Terminal sticker at the rear of the relay.
The supply range is also mentioned on the Terminal sticker and before energising, care should be
taken to confirm that the auxiliary supply being wired is within range.

10-8 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 10 Installation

2.3.3.4 Earth Connection

Every device must be connected to the cubicle earthing bar. Earthing terminal is provided on back
side of the relay. Ensure that the relay earthing is connected to the local earth bar. With several relays
present; make sure that the copper earth bar is properly installed for solidity connecting to the earthing
terminal of each relay equipment box.
Before energizing the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal, (if
provided) or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment.
The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric
shock provided by the equipment would be lost. The recommended minimum protective conductor
(earth) wire size is 2.5 mm² or as per industries standard practice. The protective conductor (earth)
connection must be of low-inductance and as short as possible.

Figure 8: Earthing terminal on the rear side of the relay

Note: To prevent any possibility of electrolytic action between brass or copper ground conductors and the
rear panel of the product, precautions should be taken to isolate them from one another. This could
be achieved in several ways, including placing a nickel-plated or insulating washer between the
conductor and the product case, or using tinned ring terminals.

2.3.3.5 Current Transformers


2
Current transformers would generally be wired with 2.5 mm PVC insulated multi-stranded copper wire
terminated with M5 ring terminals. The wires should be terminated with rings using 90º rings terminals,
with no more than two rings per terminal.
2
Due to the physical limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size you can use is 4.0 mm
using ring terminals.
The wire should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 V RMS.

Caution: Current transformer circuits must never be fused.

P154/EN M/C 10-9


10 Installation P50 Agile P154

Note 1: Terminal blocks must not be detached whilst any current transformer (CT) circuit is live. CT shorting
must be achieved by external means; the product does not include this facility.

Note 2: For 5A CT secondary, we recommend using 2 x 2.5 mm2 PVC insulated multi-stranded copper wire.

2.3.3.6 EIA(RS) 485 Connections


For connecting the EIA (RS485), use 2-core screened cable with a maximum total length of 1000 m or
200 nF total cable capacitance.
A typical cable specification would be:

• Each core: 16/0.2 mm copper conductors, PVC insulated


2

• Nominal conductor area: 0.5 mm per core


2

• Screen: Overall braid, PVC sheathed

There is no electrical connection of the cable screen to the device. The link is provided purely to link
together the two cable screens.

2.3.3.7 Output Relay Connections


These should be wired with 1 mm PVC insulated multi-stranded copper wire terminated with M4 ring
terminals.

2.3.3.8 USB Connection


The IED has a type B USB socket on the front panel. A standard USB printer cable (type A one end,
type B the other end) can be used to connect a local PC to the IED. This cable is the same as that
used for connecting a printer to a PC.

10-10 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 10 Installation

2.4 Case dimensions

V01453

Figure 9: Case dimensions

Note: All dimensions in mm.

P154/EN M/C 10-11


10 Installation P50 Agile P154

10-12 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 13 Commissioning Instructions

COMMISSIONING INSTRUCTIONS

CHAPTER 11

P154/EN M/C 13-1


13 Commissioning Instructions P50 Agile P154

13-2 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 13 Commissioning Instructions

1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter consists of the following sections:

1 Chapter Overview
2 Commissioning
2.1 Commissioning Test Menu
2.1.1 Test Mode
2.1.2 Test Pattern
2.1.3 Contact Test
2.1.4 Test LEDs
2.1.5 Opto Input status check
2.1.6 Opto Output status check
2.1.7 Commissioning Test equipment required
2.1.8 Battery check
2.1.9 External circuitry check
2.1.9.1 Earthing
2.1.9.2 CT Polarity
2.1.10 Check relay settings
2.1.11 Protection Timing checks
2.1.11.1 Overcurrent check
2.1.11.2 Connecting the Test circuit
2.1.11.3 Performing the Test
2.1.11.4 Checking the Operating time
2.1.12 Onload checks
2.1.12.1 Onload checks
2.1.13 Final check

P154/EN M/C 13-3


13 Commissioning Instructions P50 Agile P154

2 COMMISSIONING
The P154 is fully numerical in its design - it has self-supervision function which continuously keeps
track of its internal hardware, and it will display a message on the LCD screen if it detects the failure of
any component. This is why the commissioning tests are less extensive than those for non-numeric
electronic devices or electromechanical relays.

2.1 Commissioning Test Menu


The IED provides several test facilities under the COMMISSION TEST menu heading. There are
menu cells that allow you to monitor the status of the opto-inputs, output relay contacts, and user-
programmable LEDs.
This section describes the commissioning tests available in the IED's Commissioning test menu.

2.1.1 Test Mode


The Test Mode menu cell is used to allow secondary injection testing to be performed on the relay
itself without operation of the trip contacts. It also enables a facility to test the output contacts by
applying menu controlled test signals.
To select test mode, the Test Mode menu cell should be set to Test Mode, which takes the relay out
of service and blocks the maintenance, counters. It also causes an alarm condition to be recorded and
the amber OUT OF SERVICE LED to illuminate. This also freezes any information stored in the CB
Condition column and in IEC 60870-5-103 builds changes the Cause of Transmission, COT, to Test
Mode.
To enable testing of output contacts the Test Mode cell should be set to Contacts Blocked. This
blocks the protection from operating the contacts and enables the test pattern and contact test
functions which can be used to manually operate the output contacts.
Once testing is complete the cell must be set back to Disabled to restore the relay back to service.

2.1.2 Test Pattern


This cell is used to select the output relay contacts that will be tested when the Contact Test cell is set
to Apply Test.

2.1.3 Contact Test


When the Apply Test command in this cell is issued, the contacts set for operation (set to 1) in the
Test Pattern cell change state. After the test has been applied, the command text on the LCD will
change to No Operation and the contacts will remain in the Test State until reset issuing the Remove
Test command. The command text on the LCD will again revert to No Operation after the Remove
Test command has been issued.

2.1.4 Test LEDs


When the Apply Test command in this cell is issued, the 4 programmable LEDs will illuminate for
approximately 2 seconds before they extinguish and the command text on the LCD reverts to No
Operation.

2.1.5 Opto Input status check


The Opto I/P cell under SYSTEM DATA menu can be used to monitor the status of the opto-inputs
while they are sequentially energised with a suitable voltage. The cell is a binary string that displays
the status of the opto-inputs where '1' means energised and '0' means de-energised.

13-4 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 13 Commissioning Instructions

2.1.6 Opto Output status check


The Opto O/P cell under SYSTEM DATA menu can be used to monitor the status of the relay outputs.
The cell is a binary string that displays the status of the relay outputs where '1' means energised and
'0' means de-energised. The cell indicates the status of the output relays when the IED is in service.
You can check for relay damage by comparing the status of the output contacts with their associated
bits.

Note: When the Test Mode cell is set to Contacts Blocked, the relay output status indicates which contacts
would operate if the IED was in-service. It does not show the actual status of the output relays, as
they are blocked.

2.1.7 Commissioning Test equipment required


At the time of commissioning the P154, the following test equipment is required as a minimum:

• Current injection test kit


• Multimeter with suitable AC current range and DC voltage range.
• Timer with precision 1 ms.
• Required auxiliary supply.
• Connecting wire, as per required length extension board etc.
• A portable PC, installed with appropriate software (P50 Agile Configurator)

2.1.8 Battery check


If the Relay is losing its time or date settings or you are receiving a message of RTC Error, then this
may require checking internal battery. Follow the steps below:

• Remove all the electrical connection (like SCADA system, current inputs, voltage inputs, etc.)
from the relay terminals.
• Reconfigure date and time setting by using the feather touch keys.
• After re-configuring the date and time, switch OFF the relay for some time by disconnecting the
auxiliary supply.
• Switch ON the relay, and check its date and time. If you are still receiving the RTC Error
message, then replace the lithium coin battery. (Refer to instructions in the Maintenance and
Troubleshooting chapter)

2.1.9 External circuitry check


Check the relay wiring on back terminal of relay against the appropriate wiring diagram:

• CT secondary must be connected to the relay 1A or 5A. All CT wiring screws should be properly
tightened.

Warning: An open circuit of the CT secondary wiring can cause high voltage which
may be lethal and could damage insulation.

• External supply can be wired to the relay auxiliary supply terminals with proper polarity marking
as mentioned on the Terminal sticker at the top of the relay. The supply range is mentioned
under the front flap covering the USB port connection. Confirm that the auxiliary supply is in
range before energizing the relay.

P154/EN M/C 13-5


13 Commissioning Instructions P50 Agile P154

• Trip Coil contact connection should be as per the given schematic diagram.
• Latching type annunciation contact connection as per requirement of site.

2.1.9.1 Earthing
An earthing terminal is provided at the back of the relay. Ensure that the case earthing connections
are used to connect the IED to a local earth bar using an adequate conductor.
With several relays present, make sure that the copper earth bar is properly installed for solidity
connecting to the earthing terminal of each relay.

2.1.9.2 CT Polarity
Ensure proper CTs are connected as per required maximum load current and their polarity. When all
CTs are connected with proper polarity, unbalance current flowing through earth fault element will be
approximately zero. Otherwise the relay will trip on earth fault when the CB is energized.

2.1.10 Check relay settings


The relay setting check ensures that all of the application-specific settings for the particular installation
have been correctly applied to the relay. Enter all settings manually via the front panel interface or
using P50 Agile configurator tool.

2.1.11 Protection Timing checks


There is no need to check every protection function. Only one protection function needs to be checked
as the purpose is to verify the timing on the processor is functioning correctly.

2.1.11.1 Overcurrent check


If the overcurrent protection function is being used, test the overcurrent protection for stage 1.

1. Check for any possible dependency conditions and simulate as appropriate.


2. In the CONFIGURATION menu, disable all protection elements other than the one being
tested.
3. Make a note of which elements need to be re-enabled after testing.
4. Connect the test circuit
5. Perform the test
6. Check the operating time

2.1.11.2 Connecting the Test circuit

1. Identify the function associated with the overcurrent protection stage 1 trip.
2. Use the output relay RL1 for assigning the overcurrent trip function
3. Use the IO Masking function in the P50 Configurator or IO configuration menu on relay HMI to
map the protection stage under test directly to an output relay.
4. Connect the output relay so that its operation will trip the test set and stop the timer.
5. Connect the current output of the test set to the A-phase current transformer input.
6. Ensure that the timer starts when the current is applied.

2.1.11.3 Performing the Test

1. Ensure that the timer is reset.

13-6 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 13 Commissioning Instructions

2. Apply a current of twice the setting shown in the I>1 Current Set cell in the OVERCURRENT
menu.
3. Note the time displayed when the timer stops.
4. Check that the red trip LED has illuminated.

2.1.11.4 Checking the Operating time


Check that the operating time recorded by the timer is within the range shown below.
For all characteristics, allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Operating time at twice current setting and time multiplier/
Characteristic
time dial setting of 1.0
Nominal (seconds) Range (seconds)
DT I>1 Time Delay setting Setting ±5% or 55ms whichever is greater
IEC S Inverse 10.03
IEC V Inverse 13.50
IEC E Inverse 26.67
UK LT Inverse 20.00
IEEE M Inverse 3.8 Please refer to the Technical Specifications
IEEE V Inverse 7.03 chapter for operating time accuracy
IEEE E Inverse 9.50
US Inverse 2.16
US ST Inverse 12.12

Note: With the exception of the definite time characteristic, the operating times given are for a Time
Multiplier Setting (TMS) or Time Dial Setting (TDS) of 1. For other values of TMS or TDS, the values
need to be modified accordingly

Caution: On completion of the tests, you must restore all settings that were
disabled

2.1.12 Onload checks


Onload checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing the energisation of the
plant, and the other devices in the group have already been commissioned.
Remove all test leads and temporary shorting links, then replace any external wiring that has been
removed to allow testing.

Caution: If any external wiring has been disconnected for the commissioning
process, replace it in accordance with the relevant external
connection or scheme diagram.

2.1.12.1 Onload checks

1. Measure the current transformer secondary values for each input using a multimeter
connected in series with the corresponding current input.
2. Check that the current transformer polarities are correct by measuring the negative sequence
current magnitude. or derived earth fault current.

P154/EN M/C 13-7


13 Commissioning Instructions P50 Agile P154

3. Ensure the current flowing in the neutral circuit of the current transformers is negligible.
4. Compare the values of the secondary phase currents with the measured values, which can be
found in the MEASUREMENTS menu.
The ‘Secondary’ values displayed on the relay should be equal to the applied secondary current. The
values should be within 2% of the applied secondary Current. However, an additional allowance must
be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

2.1.13 Final check


1. Remove all test leads and temporary shorting leads.
2. If you have had to disconnect any of the external wiring in order to perform the wiring
verification tests, replace all wiring, fuses and links in accordance with the relevant external
connection or scheme diagram.
3. Ensure that the IED has been restored to service by checking that the Test Mode cell in the
COMMISSION TESTS menu is set to ‘Disabled’ .

4. The settings applied should be carefully checked against the required application-specific
settings to ensure that they are correct, and have not been mistakenly altered during testing.
5. Ensure that all protection elements required have been set to Enabled in the
CONFIGURATION menu.
6. If the IED is in a new installation or the circuit breaker has just been maintained, the circuit
breaker maintenance and current counters should be zero. These counters can be reset using
the Clear Maint function in the RECORD CONTROL menu.
7. If the required access level is not active, the device will prompt for a password to be entered
so that the setting change can be made.
8. If a P991/MMLG test block is installed, remove the P992/MMLB test plug and replace the
cover so that the protection is put into service.
9. Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records, alarms and LEDs and
communications statistics have been reset.

Note: Clear Maint function will clear all Maintenance record memory

13-8 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 12 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

MAINTENANCE AND
TROUBLESHOOTING

CHAPTER 12

P154/EN M/C 12-1


12 Maintenance and Troubleshooting P50 Agile P154

12-2 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 12 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter consists of the following sections:

1 Chapter Overview
2 MAINTENANCE
2.1 Maintenance checks
2.1.1 Opto-Isolators
2.1.2 Output Relays
2.1.3 Measurement Accuracy
2.2 Changing the Battery
2.2.1 Replacing the Lithium Coin Battery
2.3 Replacing the Unit
2.4 Cleaning

3 Troubleshooting

P154/EN M/C 12-3


12 Maintenance and Troubleshooting P50 Agile P154

2 MAINTENANCE

2.1 Maintenance checks

In view of the critical nature of the application, Alstom Grid products should be checked at regular
intervals to confirm they are operating correctly.
The devices are self-supervising and so require less maintenance than earlier designs of protection
devices. Most problems will result in an alarm, indicating that remedial action should be taken.
However, some periodic tests should be carried out to ensure that they are functioning correctly and
that the external wiring is intact. It is the responsibility of the customer to define the interval between
maintenance periods. If your organisation has a Preventative Maintenance Policy, the recommended
product checks should be included in the regular program. Maintenance periods depend on many
factors, such as:

• The operating environment


• The accessibility of the site
• The amount of available manpower
• The importance of the installation in the power system
• The consequences of failure

Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location, these are predominantly
restricted to checking that the unit is measuring the applied currents and voltages accurately, and
checking the circuit breaker maintenance counters. For this reason, maintenance checks should also
be performed locally at the substation.

Caution: Before carrying out any work on the equipment you should be familiar with the
contents of the Safety Section or the Safety Guide Pxxx-SG-4LM-1 and the
ratings on the equipment’s rating label.

2.1.1 Opto-Isolators
Check the opto-inputs by repeating the commissioning test detailed in the Commissioning chapter.

2.1.2 Output Relays


Check the output relays by repeating the commissioning test detailed in the Commissioning chapter.

2.1.3 Measurement Accuracy


If the power system is energised, the measured values can be compared with known system values to
check that they are in the expected range. If they are within a set range, this indicates that the A/D
conversion and the calculations are being performed correctly. Suitable test methods can be found in
Commissioning chapter.
Alternatively, the measured values can be checked against known values injected into the device
using the test block, (if fitted) or injected directly into the IED's terminals. These tests will prove the
calibration accuracy is being maintained.

2.2 Changing the Battery


The P154 relay has a battery to maintain status data and the correct time when the auxiliary supply
voltage fails.

12-4 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 12 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

The data maintained includes event, fault and disturbance records and the thermal state at the time of
failure. The battery periodically needs changing if there is a low battery condition, to ensure reliability.
The lithium coin battery is located on the CPU PCB.

Caution: Before carrying out any work on the equipment you should be familiar with the
contents of the Safety Section or the Safety Guide Pxxx-SG-4LM-1 and the
ratings on the equipment’s rating label.

2.2.1 Replacing the Lithium Coin Battery

1. Remove the relay cover by loosening the screws as shown in figure below.

Figure 1: Removal of relay cover

2. Remove the Front bezel by loosening the screws as shown in figure below.

P154/EN M/C 12-5


12 Maintenance and Troubleshooting P50 Agile P154

Figure 2: Removal of front bazel

3. Locate the exact position of the lithium coin battery on the CPU PCB

Figure 3: Battery location on CPU PCB

4. Gently remove the battery. If necessary, use a small insulated screwdriver.


5. Make sure the metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease and dust.
6. Remove the replacement battery from its packaging and insert it in the battery holder,
ensuring correct polarity. Orient the lithium coin battery so that the positive (+) side is visible.

12-6 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 12 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

Figure 4: Correct polarity of battery

Only use Panasonic make Lithium battery type BR2032 or equivalent with a nominal voltage
of 3 V.
7. Ensure that the battery is held securely in its socket and that the battery terminals make good
contact with the socket terminals.
8. Replace the front bazel and relay cover.
9. After replacing the lithium coin battery, you must reconfigure and reset the system date and
time.

2.3 Replacing the Unit


If your product should develop a fault while in service, depending on the nature of the fault, the error
codes will be generated which can be viewed on the relay HMI. First step is to take actions as
suggested in the Troubleshooting section of this manual. In the unlikely event that the problem persist
or lies with the wiring and/or terminals, then you must replace the complete device, rewire and re-
commission the device.
Once the unit has been reinstalled, it should be re-commissioned.

Caution: If the repair is not performed by an approved service centre, the warranty will
be invalidated.

Caution: Before carrying out any work on the equipment, you should be familiar with the
contents of the Safety Information section of this guide or the Safety Guide
Pxxx-SG-4LM-1 as well as the ratings on the equipment’s rating label. This
should ensure that no damage is caused by incorrect handling of the
electronic components.

Warning: Before working at the rear of the unit, isolate all voltage and current supplying
it.

Note: P154 does not support automatic current transformer shorting. Therefore for safety reasons CT
terminals to be shorted when the terminal block is removed.

P154/EN M/C 12-7


12 Maintenance and Troubleshooting P50 Agile P154

2.4 Cleaning

Warning: Before cleaning the IED, ensure that all AC and DC supplies and transformer
connections are isolated to prevent any chance of an electric shock while
cleaning.

Only clean the equipment with a lint-free cloth dampened with clean water. Do not use detergents,
solvents or abrasive cleaners as they may damage the product's surfaces and leave a conductive
residue.

12-8 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 12 Maintenance and Troubleshooting

3 TROUBLESHOOTING
The relay continuously monitors the hardware and detects any hardware fault/error. In case of
hardware failure relay displays the corresponding error code on the LCD.

• The IED performs continuous periodic self-diagnostic procedure at every one minute for
checking of all errors excluding Setting Error.
• If the error is cleared during self-diagnostic procedure, corresponding error bit will be cleared.
• For Setting Error, ADC Error and FRAM1 Error, IED goes in OUT OF SERVICE mode
(Protection will be blocked). The OUT OF SERVICE LED on the front facia will continuously
blink at 1 sec interval and ON LED indication will turn from GREEN to RED.
The faults errors are stored in the ‘Main’t Rec Num= “and can be viewed from Maint Record
submenu. The Error code is stored in 16 bit integer.
The bit definition applicable to P154 is shown as below:
Bit 12 -
Bit 11 Bit 10 Bit 6-9 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0
15
Incompatible Incompatible FRAM 1 ADC RTC Setting
Unused Unused Unused Unused
Firmware CommFirmware Error Error Error Error

The Error code descriptions are given below:


Error Code Error Data Action taken
Sr. No Description Cause Proposed action
display Bitwise by MCU
ON LED turns Red Go to
and OUT OF CONFIGURATION
1. Setting corrupted
0000 0000 SETTING SERVICE LED menu, restore default
1 0001 2. Change of Setting starts blinking.
0000 0001 Error settings and then save
address in memory settings. Press (EDIT +
(Protection is
blocked) PROT. RESET).
1. I2C Bus Error Set correct values for
0000 0000 RTC 2. Damaged RTC Date & Time and press
2 0004 ON LED turns Red
0000 0100 Error 3. Battery backup not (EDIT + PROT.
functioning RESET).

ON LED turns Red


and OUT OF
1. ADC device not
0000 0000 ADC SERVICE LED Press (EDIT + PROT.
3 0010 working.
0001 0000 Error starts blinking. RESET)
2. SPI bus error
(Protection is
blocked)
0000 0000 FRAM 1 1. SPI bus error Press (EDIT +
4 0020 ON LED turns Red
0010 0000 Error 2. FRAM not working PROT. RESET)
Firmware being flashed
Incompatible 0000 0100 has communication Flash correct FW as per
5 Incompatible protocol not compatible to ON LED turns Red the cortec information
CommFirmware 0000 0000 CommFirmware the protocol option as per on the relay.
Error relay model number.
Firmware being flashed ON LED turns Red
is not compatible to the and OUT OF
Incompatible 0000 1000 Incompatible hardware as per relay SERVICE LED Flash correct FW as per
6 Firmware model number. (e.g. starts blinking. the cortec information
Firmware 0000 0000 Error mismatch in CT selection/ on the relay.
DI Input threshold voltage (Protection is
etc.) blocked)

P154/EN M/C 12-9


12 Maintenance and Troubleshooting P50 Agile P154

12-10 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 13 Technical Specifications

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

CHAPTER 13

P154/EN M/C 13-1


13 Technical Specifications P50 Agile P154

13-2 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 13 Technical Specifications

1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter consists of the following sections:

1 Chapter Overview
2 Technical Specification
2.1.1 Standards Compliance

P154/EN M/C 13-3


13 Technical Specifications P50 Agile P154

2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

Current Input
I. CT secondary 1 A or 5 A (by wiring)
II. Nominal burden at rated current (without < 0.20 VA at rated current (In)
tripping condition)
III. Thermal withstand capacity 100 x rated current (In) for 1s
50 x rated current (In) for 3s
4 x rated current (In) continuous for Phase and E/F CT
2 x rated current (In) continuous for SEF CT
IV. Measurement linearity range For O/C : 0.05 – 40 In
(for non – offset AC current) For E/F : 0.05 – 40 In
For SEF : 0.002 – 4 In
V. Measurement accuracy Typical ± 2% at In for Phase and EF CTs
VI. Nominal frequency range for current Inputs 50/60 Hz (selectable in P154 Menu)
VII. Frequency measurement range 45 Hz – 65 Hz
Auxiliary Supply
I. Nominal auxiliary voltage 24-230 V AC (50 / 60 Hz) or
24-230 V DC
II. Operating range 80% of lower nominal range and 120% of upper nominal range for DC supply
80% of lower nominal range and 110% of upper nominal range for AC supply
III. Nominal burden on 24 – 230 V auxiliary power 24-230 VAC < 9 VA (no status energized)
supply < 12 VA (with all status and output energised)
24-230 V DC <3W (no status energized)
< 4.5 W (with all status and output energised)
IV. Tolerable ac ripple Up to 15% of highest dc supply, as per IEC 60255-26: 2013
V. Relay power-up time < 2.50s
Opto Isolated Input

I. Nominal operating voltage range 24-230 V AC (50 / 60 Hz) or


24-230 V DC
II. Threshold setting (ordering option) Option -1* Option -2 Option -3 Option -4
Threshold voltage for DC 18V +/- 3V 35V +/- 3V 77V +/- 3V 154V +/- 3V
Threshold voltage for AC 16V +/- 3V 33V +/- 3V 75V +/- 3V 152V +/- 3V
Maximum operating voltage range 276VDC / AC 276VDC / AC 276VDC / AC 276VDC / AC

*Note: The inputs must be connected via screened cable or twisted


pair cable.

III. Drop out Within 85% of threshold voltage value


IV. VA burden of opto inputs For each status < 1.5 W / VA
V. Filtering time < 40 ms
VI. Logic input recognition time For all Status Inputs: filtering time + 5 ms ± 5 ms
Output Contact
I. Non Latching contact Continuous Continuous 5A/250 V AC
Make & carry 30A for 3s

13-4 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 13 Technical Specifications

Short time withstand capacity 50A for 1s


Breaking capacity AC- 1250 VA max. 5A or 250 V (PF= 0.4)
DC- 100 W resistive max. 5A or 300 V
50 W Inductive (L/R =45 ms) max. 5A or 300 V
Operating time <10 ms
Minimum no. of operations 10,000 operation loaded condition & unloaded
100,000 operations
Accuracy of protection function
Overcurrent
I. Operating value Pick-up Setting +10% / - 5%
Minimum trip level (IDMT) 1.05 x Setting ± 5%
Drop –off 0.95 x Setting ± 5%
II. Operating time IDMT characteristic shape As per clause 5.2 of IEC60255-151 or
50 ms whichever is greater
DT operation ± 5% or 55 ms whichever is greater**
** Reference condition Currents applied at 2x pick-up level or
higher
III. Reset time DT Set delay ±10%
IDMT (only for IEEE & US curves) Calculated time ±10%
Earth Fault 1 (Measured)-Standard CT / SEF CT
I. Operating value Pick-up Setting +10% / - 5%
Minimum trip level (IDMT) 1.05 x Setting ± 5%
Drop –off 0.95 x Setting ± 5%
II. Operating time IDMT characteristic shape As per clause 5.2 of IEC60255-151 or
50 ms whichever is greater
DT operation ± 5% or 55 ms whichever is greater**
** Reference condition Currents applied at 2x pick-up level or
higher
III. Reset time DT Set delay ±10%
IDMT (only for IEEE & US curves) Calculated time ±10%
Earth Fault 2 (Derived)
I. Operating value Pick-up Setting +10% / - 5%
Minimum trip level (IDMT) 1.05 x Setting ± 5%
Drop –off 0.95 x Setting ± 5%
II. Operating time IDMT characteristic shape As per clause 5.2 of IEC60255-151 or
50 ms whichever is greater
DT operation ± 5% or 55 ms whichever is greater**
** Reference condition Currents applied at 2x pick-up level or
higher
III. Reset time DT Set delay ±10%
IDMT (only for IEEE & US curves) Calculated time ±10%

P154/EN M/C 13-5


13 Technical Specifications P50 Agile P154

Negative Phase Sequence Overcurrent


I. Operating value Pick-up Setting +10% / - 5%
Minimum trip level (IDMT) 1.05 x Setting ± 5%
Drop –off 0.95 x Setting ± 5%
II. Operating time IDMT characteristic shape As per clause 5.2 of IEC60255-151 or
50 ms whichever is greater
DT operation ± 5% or 55 ms whichever is greater**
** Reference condition Currents applied at 2x pick-up level or
higher
III. Reset time DT Set delay ±10%
IDMT (only for IEEE & US curves) Calculated time ±10%
Broken Conductor
I. Operating value Pick-up 1.05 x Setting ± 5%
Drop –off 0.95 x Setting ± 5%
DT operation ± 5% or 55 ms whichever is greater
2nd Harmonic
I. Operating value 2ndHarm Thresh Setting ± 15%
I>lift 2H Setting ± 15%
Thermal Overload
I. Operating time Thermal Trip ± 10% of calculated time
Under current
I. Operating value Pick-up 0.95 x Settings ± 7.50%
Drop –off 1.05 x Settings ± 7.50%
Operating time DT operation ± 5% or 55 ms whichever is greater
Cold Load Pickup
tcold operating time tcold Setting ± 10%
tclp operating time tclp Setting ± 10%
Operating value Pick-up Setting +10% / - 5%
Minimum trip level (IDMT) 1.05 x Setting ± 5%
Drop –off 0.95 x Settings ± 5%
Operating time IDMT characteristic shape As per clause 5.2 of IEC60255-151 or
50 ms whichever is greater
DT operation ± 5% or 55 ms whichever is greater**
** Reference condition Currents applied at 2x pick-up level or
higher
CB Fail
I. Operating time DT operation ± 5% or 55 ms whichever is greater
CBF Reset <40 ms*
Reset current Setting ± 10%
* Note : Filtering time (typically 25ms) is added when CBF initiated by external Binary input

Note: As per IEC60255-151 clause 5.2 (assigned error 5%), the tolerances are calculated as below.

Value of characteristic quantity as multiple of setting value (Gs) 2-5 5-10 Above 10
Limiting error as multiple of an assigned error 2.5 1.5 1

13-6 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 13 Technical Specifications

Operating conditions
I. Relative humidity Humidity (RH) 95% maximum
II. Operating temperature range -25 ºC to +55 ºC
III. Storage temperature range -25 ºC to +70 ºC
Terminals specification
I. AC current input terminals M5 threaded terminals for ring lug connection. Suitable up to 4 mm2
II. Auxiliary & input/output M4 threaded terminal connection. Suitable up to 2.5 mm2
Terminals

III. Tightening torque for M4/M5 Maximum torque of 1.2 Nm


screws
IV. Rear communication terminal Two wire connection. Suitable up to 2.5 mm2
Mechanical & Environmental specification
I. Design Flush mounting case
II. Weight 3.50 Kg approximate
III. Pollution Degree II

2.1.1 Standards Compliance

SR.
TYPE TEST STANDARD TEST SPECIFICATION/METHOD
NO.
1. Impulse, Dielectric and Insulation tests
Test voltage 5kv, 1.2/50 µV
Energy 0.5 J
IEC 60255-27:2005 Polarity +ve and –ve
1.1 Impulse voltage test
(incl. corrigendum 2007) No. of impulses 3 on each polarity
Duration between impulses 5s
EUT condition Non energised
IEC 60255-27:2005 1) 2kV rms for 1 minute between all terminals connected together with case earth.
Dielectric voltage 2) 2kV rms for 1 minute between independent circuits with case earth.
1.2 (incl. corrigendum 2007)
withstand test
3) 1.5kV rms for 1 minute across open contacts of changeover output relays.

Insulation resistance IEC 60255-27:2005


1.3 > 100 MΩ at 500V DC
test (incl. corrigendum 2007)

Creepage distances IEC 60255-27:2005 Pollution degree : 2


1.4
and clearances (incl. corrigendum 2007) Overvoltage category : III

P154/EN M/C 13-7


13 Technical Specifications P50 Agile P154

2. Auxiliary Supply tests


IEC 61000-4-29 Class A Residual voltage
2.1 D.C. voltage dips IEC60255-26(ed3.0)- 1) At 40% for 200ms. 2) At 70% for 500ms.
2013
1) DC auxiliary supply interruptions for 10, 20ms with no loss of protection.
IEC 61000-4-29 Class A
DC voltage
2.2 IEC60255-26(ed3.0)- 2) DC auxiliary supply interruptions 50ms, 100ms, 200ms, 0.5s, 5s with temporary
interruption
2013 loss of protection.

IEC 61000-4-11 Class A Residual voltage


2.3 AC voltage dips IEC60255-26(ed3.0)- 1) At 40% for 200ms. 2) At 70% for 500ms.
2013 3) At 80% for 5s.
IEC 61000-4-11 Class A 1) AC auxiliary supply interruptions for 10, 20ms with no loss of protection.
A.C. voltage
2.4 IEC60255-26(ed3.0)- 2) AC auxiliary supply interruptions for 50ms, 100ms, 200ms, 0.5s, 5s with
interruption
2013 temporary loss of protection.
IEC 60255-11, Level: 15%
AC (ripple) in DC
2.5 IEC60255-26(ed3.0)- Frequency: 100/120 Hz
supply
2013

The unit must power down and up correctly with no mal operation.

Gradual shutdown/ IEC60255-26(ed3.0)-


2.6 Shut down time 60 s
start-up test 2013
Power off time 5 min.
Startup time 60 s

Reversal of DC power IEC 60255-11


2.7 Product shall withstand for 1 minute with Reverse polarity of power supply inputs.
supply polarity test

3. Emission tests
The EUT shall satisfy the requirement of this specification.
Radiation measured at a distance of 10 meter.
EN55022:2006+A1:2007
Radiated emission Frequency range Limits
3.1 IEC60255-26(ed3.0)-2013
test 30 MHz – 230 MHz 40 dB (µV/m)
230 MHz – 1000 MHz 47 dB (µV/m)
EUT condition Energised
The EUT shall satisfy the requirement of this specification.
Frequency range Limits
0.15 – 0.5 MHz 79 dB/µV (Quasi peak)
Conducted IEC60255-26(ed3.0)-2013
3.2 66 dB/µV (Average)
emission test
0.5 – 30 MHz 73 dB/µV (Quasi peak)
60 dB/µV (Average)
EUT Condition Energised

13-8 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 13 Technical Specifications

4. Immunity tests
1) 2.5 kV Common mode
a) Between independent circuit and case earth.
IEC 60255-22-1 and
High frequency b) Independent circuit.
4.1 IEC60255-26(ed3.0)-2013
disturbance test 2) 1 kV Differential mode
a) Independent circuit.
EUT condition : Energised
1) 15kV air discharge
EN61000-4-2:2009 Level 3
and Level 4 2) 8kV contact discharge
Electrostatic
4.2 3) 15kV indirect discharge
discharge IEC60255-26(ed3.0)-2013
EUT condition : Energised

1) 4KV: Power supply common mode


EN61000-4-5:2006 Level 2) 2KV Power Supply differential mode
Surge immunity 4
4.3 3) 4KV CT / input / output ports common mode
test
IEC60255-26(ed3.0)-2013 4) 2KV CT / input / output ports differential mode
EUT condition : Energised

EN 61000-4-4:2004 + 1) 4kV 5 kHz and 100 kHz, applied to all circuits excluding communication ports
4.4 Fast transient A1:2010 Level 4.
2) 2kV 5 kHz and 100 kHz, applied to communication ports
IEC60255-26(ed3.0)-2013 EUT condition: Energised

Voltage level 10 V/m and 30 V/m


Radiated radio Frequency range
frequency EN 61000-4-3: 800 – 1000 MHz , 1.4 – 2.7 GHz
• For 10 V/m
4.5 electromagnetic 2006+A1:2008 Level 4,
field disturbance • For 30V/m 80 – 960 MHz , 1.4 – 2 GHz
IEC60255-26(ed3.0)-2013
test Modulation 80% AM @ 1 KHz
Spot Frequency 80, 160, 380, 450, 900,1850 & 2150MHz
Voltage level 10 V

Conducted Frequency range 0.15 – 80 MHz


EN 61000-4-6: 2009
disturbance Level 3
4.6 Modulation 80% AM @ 1 KHz
inducted by radio
Frequency field IEC60255-26(ed3.0)-2013
Dwell time 2.85 sec.

Spot frequency 27, 68 MHz


1) Class 5: 100A/m field applied continuously in all planes for the EUT in a quiescent
and tripping state
Power frequency EN61000-4-8:2010 Level 5
4.7 magnetic field 2) Class 5: 1000A/m field applied for 3s in all planes for the EUT in a quiescent and
immunity IEC60255-26(ed3.0)-2013 tripping state
EUT condition : Energized

Pulsed magnetic EN 61000-4- Class 5: 1000A/m field applied continuously in all planes for the EUT in a quiescent
4.8
field immunity 9:1993+A1:2001, Level 5 and tripping state

P154/EN M/C 13-9


13 Technical Specifications P50 Agile P154

Damped oscillatory EN61000-4-10:1993 + Class 5: 100A/m field applied in all planes at 100kHz / 1MHz with burst duration of 2
4.9
magnetic field A1:2001, Level 5 Sec.

Damped oscillatory EN 61000-4-18: 2007 + 1) 100kHz and 1MHz slow damped oscillatory applied in common mode at 2.5 KV
4.10
test A1:2010 2) 3MHz, 10MHz, 30MHz fast damped oscillatory applied in common mode at 1 KV

5. Mechanical tests
Frequency range 10 Hz to 150 Hz
Crossover frequency 58 to 60 Hz

Vibration Peak displacement before crossover 0.075mm


5.1 EN 60255-21-1:1996 Class 2
response test Peak acceleration after crossover 1 gn
No. of sweep cycles per axis 1
EUT condition Energised

Frequency range 10 to 250Hz

Vibration Peak acceleration 2 gn


5.2 endurance EN 60255-21-1:1996 Class 2
test No. of sweep cycles per axis 20

EUT condition Non energised

Peak acceleration 10 gn

Pulse duration 11 ms
Shock
5.3 EN 60255-21-2:1996 Class 2
response test
No. of pulses in each direction 5

EUT condition Energised

Peak acceleration 30 gn

Shock Pulse duration 11 ms


5.4 endurance EN 60255-21-2:1996 Class 2
test No. of pulses in each direction 3

EUT condition Non energised

Peak acceleration 20 gn

Pulse duration 16 ms
5.5 Bump test EN 60255-21-2:1996 Class 2
No. of pulses in each direction 1000

EUT condition Non energized

Frequency range 1 to 35 Hz
Crossover frequency 8 Hz
EN 60255-21-3:1995 (Class 2 -
5.6 Seismic test Peak displacement before crossover X 7.5 mm
2g peak)
Peak displacement before crossover Y 3.5 mm
Peak acceleration after crossover X 2 gn

13-10 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 13 Technical Specifications

5. Mechanical tests
Peak acceleration after crossover Y 1 gn
No. of sweep cycles per axis 1
EUT condition Energised

6. Environmental tests
Start-up +20°C (EUT energised) Functional verification tests for 2 hours
Functional verification
Intermediate +40°C (EUT energised)
tests for 2 hours
High temperature claim +65°C (EUT Operate for 96 hours at highest rated
energised at highest rated voltage) voltage (HRV)
IEC 60255-1, High temperature claim +70°C
6.1 Dry heat test Storage for 96 hours
IEC 60068-2-2: 2007 Bd (EUT not energised)
Hot start +65°C
Operate for 2 hours at
(EUT energised at highest rated
highest rated voltage (HRV)
voltage)
Functional verification
Last test +20°C (EUT energised)
tests for 2 hours
Start-up +20 °C (EUT energised) Functional verification tests for 2 hours
Intermediate 0°C (EUT energised) Functional verification tests for 2 hours
Intermediate -10°C (EUT energised) Functional verification tests for 2 hours
IEC 60255-1, Low temperature - 25°C (EUT Functional verification tests for 96 hours
6.2 Cold test energised)
IEC 60068-2-1: 2007
Low temperature -25°C (EUT not Storage for 96 hours
energised)
Cold start -25°C (EUT energised) Operate for 2 hours
Last test +20°C (EUT energised) Functional verification tests for 2 hours
Lower temperature -25°C
Higher temperature +65°C
Change of IEC 60255-1, Rate of change of temperature 1°C/min
6.3 temperature
test EN 60068-2-14:2009 Nb Duration of exposure 5 cycle
Duration of cycle 3 + 3 hrs.
EUT condition Energised
Operating temperature +65°C

Damp heat Humidity 93%


6.4 steady state EN 60068-2-78, EN60068-2-30
test Duration of exposure 10 days

EUT condition Energised

Lower temperature +25°C


Humidity 97%
Higher temperature +65°C
Damp heat IEC60068-2-30
6.5 Humidity 93%
cyclic test
Duration of exposure 6 cycle
Duration of cycle 12 + 12 hrs.
EUT condition Energised

P154/EN M/C 13-11


13 Technical Specifications P50 Agile P154

6. Environmental tests

IP52 For Front

Enclosure
6.6 EN 60529:2000 IP20 For Rear
protection

EUT Condition Non energised

13-12 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 14 Wiring Diagrams

WIRING DIAGRAMS

CHAPTER 14

P154/EN M/C 14-1


14 Wiring Diagrams P50 Agile P154

14-4 P154/EN M/C


P50 Agile P154 14 Wiring Diagrams

1 CHAPTER OVERVIEW
This chapter consists of the following sections:

1 Chapter Overview
2 Wiring diagram

P154/EN M/C 14-3


14 Wiring Diagrams P50 Agile P154

2 WIRING DIAGRAM

Figure 1: P154 wiring diagram

14-4 P154/EN M/C


Alstom Grid

© - ALSTOM 2016. All rights reserved.


Information contained in this document is
indicative only. No representation or warranty
is given or should be relied on that it is
complete or correct or will apply to any
particular project. This will depend on the
technical and commercial circumstances. It is
provided without liability and is subject to
change without notice. Reproduction, use or
disclosure to third parties, without express
written authority, is strictly prohibited.
Alstom Grid Worldwide Contact Centre
www.alstom.com/grid/contactcentre/
Tel: +44 (0) 1785 250 070

www.alstom.com

You might also like